DR4300
Circular Chart Recorder
Product Manual
44-01-25-14
12/03
Revision I
Industrial Measurement and Control
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
About This Document
Abstract
This manual contains instructions for installation, operation, and troubleshooting of the DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder.
References
The following list identifies all documents that may be sources of reference for material discussed in this
publication.
Document Title
Doc ID
How to Apply Digital Instrumentation in Severe Electrical
Noise Environments
51-52-05-01
Modbus® RTU Serial Communications User Manual
51-52-25-66
51-52-25-71
Modbus® RTU Serial Communications User Manual
Configuration Interface for DR4300
Contacts
World Wide Web
The following lists Honeywell’s World Wide Web sites that will be of interest to our customers.
Honeywell Organization
WWW Address (URL)
http://www.honeywell.com
Corporate
Industrial Measurement and Control
International
http://www.honeywell.com/imc
http://www.honeywell.com/Business/global.asp
Telephone
Contact us by telephone at the numbers listed below.
Organization
Phone Number
United States and Canada
Honeywell
1-800-423-9883 Tech. Support
1-888-423-9883 Q&A Faxback
(TACFACS)
1-800-525-7439 Service
12/03
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
iii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder
Symbol Definitions
The following table lists those symbols used in this document to denote certain conditions.
Symbol
Definition
This CAUTION symbol on the equipment refers the user to the Product Manual for
additional information. This symbol appears next to required information in the manual.
WARNING
PERSONAL INJURY: Risk of electrical shock. This symbol warns the user of a
potential shock hazard where HAZARDOUS LIVE voltages greater than 30 Vrms, 42.4
Vpeak, or 60 Vdc may be accessible. Failure to comply with these instructions
could result in death or serious injury.
ATTENTION, Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) hazards. Observe precautions for
handling electrostatic sensitive devices
Protective Earth (PE) terminal. Provided for connection of the protective earth (green
or green/yellow) supply system conductor.
Functional earth terminal. Used for non-safety purposes such as noise immunity
improvement. NOTE: This connection shall be bonded to protective earth at the source
of supply in accordance with national local electrical code requirements.
Earth Ground. Functional earth connection. NOTE: This connection shall be bonded to
Protective earth at the source of supply in accordance with national and local electrical
code requirements.
Chassis Ground. Identifies a connection to the chassis or frame of the equipment shall
be bonded to Protective Earth at the source of supply in accordance with national and
local electrical code requirements.
iv
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
12/03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
1. OVERVIEW .............................................................................................................. 1
1.1 Introduction .................................................................................................................................. 1
1.2 Model Number Breakdown .......................................................................................................... 4
1.3 About This Manual....................................................................................................................... 9
2. INSTALLATION ..................................................................................................... 11
2.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................... 11
2.2 Mounting Considerations and Overall Dimensions.................................................................... 15
2.3 Mounting Methods ..................................................................................................................... 16
2.3.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................... 16
2.3.2 Mounting Flush in Panel (New Panel Cutout)............................................................... 17
2.3.3 Panel Mounting Recorder with NEMA4 or Heavy Duty door...................................... 18
2.3.4 Mounting on a 2-inch pipe ............................................................................................ 20
2.3.5 Mounting on Surface (of Panel or Wall) ....................................................................... 21
2.4 Wiring Prerequisites ................................................................................................................... 22
2.5 Input Wiring ............................................................................................................................... 27
2.5.1 Power Wiring................................................................................................................. 27
2.5.2 Analog Input Wiring...................................................................................................... 31
2.5.3 Digital Inputs (Optional) ............................................................................................... 33
2.5.4 Communication (Optional)............................................................................................ 35
2.6 Output Wiring............................................................................................................................. 37
2.6.1 Discrete Outputs ............................................................................................................ 37
2.6.2 Current Output............................................................................................................... 41
2.6.3 Transmitter Power Out .................................................................................................. 43
3. CONFIGURATION, STARTUP, AND OPERATION OF BASIC RECORDER
WITHOUT DISPLAY .............................................................................................. 45
3.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................... 45
3.2 Configuration (Recording Set Up).............................................................................................. 46
3.2.1 Setting Configuration and Input Switches..................................................................... 46
3.2.2 Setting SW6 Switch 2.................................................................................................... 64
3.3 Startup and Operation of Recorder without Display .................................................................. 65
3.3.1 Overview ....................................................................................................................... 65
3.3.2 Preparing the Recorder for Operation............................................................................ 66
3.3.3 Running the Optional Step Test..................................................................................... 67
3.3.4 Startup............................................................................................................................ 69
4. CONFIGURATION, STARTUP AND OPERATION OF RECORDER WITH
DISPLAY................................................................................................................ 71
4.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................... 71
12/03
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder
4.2 Operator Interface on Recorder with Display and Keypad......................................................... 72
4.3 Configuration (Recording and Output Set Up)........................................................................... 74
4.3.1 Overview ....................................................................................................................... 74
4.3.2 Configuration Prompts .................................................................................................. 75
4.3.3 How to Get Started ........................................................................................................ 77
4.3.4 Configuration Tips......................................................................................................... 78
4.3.5 Switch Settings .............................................................................................................. 79
4.3.6 Configuration Procedure................................................................................................ 83
4.3.7 Input Parameters Set Up Group..................................................................................... 85
4.3.8 Pen Parameters Set Up Group ....................................................................................... 89
4.3.9 Chart Parameters Set Up Group .................................................................................... 90
4.3.10 Totalizer Parameters Set Up Group............................................................................... 91
4.3.11 Control Parameters Set Up Group ................................................................................. 94
4.3.12 Tuning Parameters Set Up Group................................................................................ 100
4.3.13 Setpoint Ramp/Program Set Up Group ....................................................................... 104
4.3.14 Timer Set Up Group .................................................................................................... 105
4.3.15 Alarms Set Up Group .................................................................................................. 106
4.3.16 Auxiliary Output Set Up Group................................................................................... 109
4.3.17 Communication Set Up Group .................................................................................... 111
4.3.18 Remote Switch (Digital Inputs) Set Up Group............................................................ 112
4.3.19 Display Parameter Set Up Group ................................................................................ 114
4.3.20 Lock Out Parameter Set Up Group.............................................................................. 115
4.3.21 Configuration Record Sheet ........................................................................................ 116
4.3.22 Limit Control Configuration........................................................................................ 118
4.4 Startup of Recorder with Display and Keypad......................................................................... 119
4.4.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................... 119
4.4.2 Preparing the Recorder for Startup.............................................................................. 120
4.4.3 Running the Optional Step Test................................................................................... 121
4.4.4 Completing Preparation and Startup............................................................................ 123
4.5 Operation of Recorder with Display and Keypad..................................................................... 128
4.5.1 Monitoring Your Recorder.......................................................................................... 128
4.5.2 Operator Functions ...................................................................................................... 132
5. INPUT AND OUTPUT CALIBRATION FOR RECORDER WITH DISPLAY ........ 141
5.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................. 141
5.2 Input Calibration Minimum and Maximum Range Values ...................................................... 142
5.3 Input Calibration Preliminary Information............................................................................... 144
5.4 Input Calibration Set Up and Wiring........................................................................................ 146
5.4.1 General Calibration Set Up.......................................................................................... 146
5.4.2 Thermocouple Inputs Using a Compensated Calibrator.............................................. 147
5.4.3 Thermocouple Inputs Using an Ice Bath or Ice Point Reference................................. 148
5.4.4 RTD (Resistance Temperature Detector) Inputs ......................................................... 149
5.5 Input Calibration Procedure...................................................................................................... 151
5.6 Current Output Calibration....................................................................................................... 153
6. ROUTINE MAINTENANCE.................................................................................. 157
vi
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
12/03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................. 157
6.2 Replacing the Chart .................................................................................................................. 158
6.3 Replacing the Ink Cartridge...................................................................................................... 159
6.4 Maximizing Pen Life................................................................................................................ 160
7. TROUBLESHOOTING AND PEN ALIGNMENT OF BASIC RECORDER
WITHOUT DISPLAY ............................................................................................ 161
7.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................. 161
7.2 Observable Symptoms of Failure ............................................................................................. 163
7.3 Troubleshooting Procedures..................................................................................................... 164
7.3.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................... 164
7.3.2 Recorder Failure Troubleshooting............................................................................... 165
7.3.3 Pen Trace Troubleshooting.......................................................................................... 166
7.3.4 Chart Rotation Troubleshooting.................................................................................. 167
7.3.5 Troubleshooting Erratic Pen Movement...................................................................... 168
7.4 Alignment of Pen at Zero and 100 % ....................................................................................... 169
8. TROUBLESHOOTING AND PEN ALIGNMENT OF RECORDER WITH
DISPLAY.............................................................................................................. 171
8.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................. 171
8.2 Troubleshooting Aids ............................................................................................................... 173
8.3 Self Diagnostics........................................................................................................................ 174
8.3.1 Power up tests.............................................................................................................. 174
8.3.2 View Status of Tests.................................................................................................... 175
8.3.3 Background Tests ........................................................................................................ 176
8.3.4 Error Messages ............................................................................................................ 176
8.4 Observable Symptoms of Failure ............................................................................................. 179
8.5 Troubleshooting Procedures..................................................................................................... 180
8.5.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................... 180
8.5.2 Recorder Failure Troubleshooting............................................................................... 181
8.5.3 Pen Trace Troubleshooting.......................................................................................... 182
8.5.4 Chart Rotation Troubleshooting.................................................................................. 183
8.5.5 Troubleshooting Erratic Pen Movement...................................................................... 184
8.5.6 Troubleshooting the Keypad and Display ................................................................... 184
8.5.7 Troubleshooting Relay Output .................................................................................... 185
8.5.8 Troubleshooting External Alarm Function.................................................................. 186
8.5.9 Troubleshooting Remote Switch (Digital Input) Function.......................................... 186
8.5.10 Troubleshooting Modbus Communications ................................................................ 187
8.6 Alignment of Pen at Zero and Span.......................................................................................... 188
9. PARTS LIST......................................................................................................... 191
9.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................. 191
9.2 Exploded Views........................................................................................................................ 192
12/03
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
vii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder
A. ACCURACY......................................................................................................... 199
A.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................. 199
A.2 Typical Reference Accuracy..................................................................................................... 200
B. AVAILABLE 10-INCH CHARTS .......................................................................... 203
B.1 Single Range Charts ................................................................................................................. 203
B.2 Dual Range Charts.................................................................................................................... 208
C. SETPOINT RAMP/SOAK PROGRAMMING AND OPERATION......................... 211
C.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................. 211
C.2 Program Contents.................................................................................................................. 212
C.3 Drawing a Ramp/Soak Profile.................................................................................................. 214
C.4 Setpoint Program Prompt Hierarchy ........................................................................................ 218
C.5 Run/Monitor the Program......................................................................................................... 221
D. USING ACCUTUNE II .......................................................................................... 225
D.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................. 225
D.2 Starting and Stopping Tuning with Accutune II....................................................................... 226
D.3 Using Accutune with Duplex (Heat/Cool) Control .................................................................. 227
E. FOREIGN LANGUAGE SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS............................................. 229
F. HONEYWELL SERVICE CENTERS.................................................................... 241
viii
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
12/03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tables
Table 2-1 Operating Limits and Condensed Specifications .......................................................................................12
Table 2-2 Mounting Flush in a New Panel Cutout.....................................................................................................17
Table 2-3 Procedure for Mounting Recorder with NEMA4 or Heavy Duty Door.....................................................18
Table 2-4 Pipe Mounting Procedure...........................................................................................................................20
Table 2-5 Mounting Flush on a Surface (of Panel or Wall) .......................................................................................21
Table 2-6 Wiring Bundling Categories ......................................................................................................................26
Table 2-7 Wiring Illustrations ....................................................................................................................................26
Table 2-8 Procedure for Power Wiring Models .........................................................................................................28
Table 2-9 Analog Input Wiring..................................................................................................................................31
Table 2-10 Digital Input Wiring.................................................................................................................................33
Table 2-11 Communication Wiring............................................................................................................................35
Table 2-12 Output Terminal Use for Output Algorithm and Option Combinations ..................................................37
Table 2-13 Relay Output Wiring - 1 or 2 Pen Models ...............................................................................................38
Table 2-14 Current Output Wiring.............................................................................................................................41
Table 2-15 Transmitter Power Out Wiring.................................................................................................................43
Table 3-1 Procedure for Configuring Model without Display ...................................................................................46
Table 3-2 Configuration and Input Switch Settings for Models without Display......................................................49
Table 3-3 Preparing the Recorder for Operation........................................................................................................66
Table 3-4 Procedure for Running the Step Test .........................................................................................................67
Table 3-5 Startup Procedure.......................................................................................................................................69
Table 4-1 Key Functions ............................................................................................................................................73
Table 4-2 Configuration Tips .....................................................................................................................................78
Table 4-3 SW6 Input Switch Settings for Models Having Display and Keypad ......................................................80
Table 4-4 Configuration Procedure............................................................................................................................83
Table 4-5 Input Parameter Definitions .......................................................................................................................85
Table 4-6 Pen Parameter Definitions..........................................................................................................................89
Table 4-7 Chart Parameter Definitions.......................................................................................................................90
Table 4-8 Totalizer Function Definitions ...................................................................................................................91
Table 4-9 Control Parameter Definitions ...................................................................................................................94
Table 4-10 Tuning Parameter Definitions................................................................................................................101
Table 4-11 Setpoint Ramp Parameter Definitions....................................................................................................104
Table 4-12 Timer Parameter Definitions..................................................................................................................105
Table 4-13 Alarm Parameter Definitions .................................................................................................................106
Table 4-14 Auxiliary Output Parameter Definitions ................................................................................................109
Table 4-15 Communication Parameter Definitions..................................................................................................111
Table 4-16 Remote Switch Parameter Definitions ...................................................................................................113
Table 4-17 Display Parameter Definitions ...............................................................................................................114
Table 4-18 Lockout Parameter Definitions ..............................................................................................................115
Table 4-19 Limit Control Parameter Definitions......................................................................................................118
Table 4-20 Preparing the Recorder for Operation....................................................................................................120
Table 4-21 Procedure for Running the Step Test .....................................................................................................121
Table 4-22 Procedure for Setting Chart Time and Applying Power ........................................................................123
Table 4-23 Power-Up Diagnostic Tests....................................................................................................................124
Table 4-24 Procedure for Testing the Displays and Keys........................................................................................125
Table 4-25 Procedure for Starting the Recorder.......................................................................................................126
Table 4-26 Meaning of Indicators ............................................................................................................................129
Table 4-27 Lower Display Operating Parameter Labels ..........................................................................................130
Table 4-28 Error Messages.......................................................................................................................................131
Table 4-29 Procedure for Selecting Automatic or Manual Mode ............................................................................133
Table 4-30 Procedure for Changing the Control Setpoints ......................................................................................134
Table 4-31 Procedure for Displaying or Changing the Alarm Setpoints..................................................................135
Table 4-32 Procedure for Selecting Factory or Field Calibration Values ................................................................136
12/03
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
ix
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder
Table 4-33 Procedure for Resetting Totalizer ..........................................................................................................137
Table 4-34 Procedure for Starting Timer .................................................................................................................138
Table 4-35 Procedure for Resetting Limit Controller...............................................................................................139
Table 5-1 Voltage and Resistance Equivalents for 0 % and 100 % Range Values ..................................................143
Table 5-2 Equipment Needed for Calibration ..........................................................................................................144
Table 5-3 Disconnect the Field Wiring ....................................................................................................................145
Table 5-4 General Calibration Set Up Procedure.....................................................................................................146
Table 5-5 Set Up Wiring Procedure for Thermocouple Inputs Using a Compensated Calibrator ..........................147
Table 5-6 Set Up Wiring Procedure for Thermocouple Inputs Using an Ice Bath...................................................148
Table 5-7 Set Up Wiring Procedure for Calibrating RTD Inputs.............................................................................149
Table 5-8 Set Up Wiring Procedure for Calibrating Millivolts, Volts, and Milliamps Inputs .................................150
Table 5-9 Input Calibration Procedure Sequence.....................................................................................................151
Table 5-10 Set Up Wiring Procedure for Current Proportional Output ...................................................................153
Table 5-11 Procedure for Calibrating Current Output..............................................................................................154
Table 6-1 Procedure for Replacing the Chart...........................................................................................................158
Table 6-2 Procedure for Replacing the Ink Cartridge ..............................................................................................159
Table 6-3 Maximizing Pen Life................................................................................................................................160
Table 7-1 Observable Symptoms of Failure.............................................................................................................163
Table 7-2 Troubleshooting Recorder Failure Symptoms .........................................................................................165
Table 7-3 Troubleshooting Pen Trace Failure Symptoms........................................................................................166
Table 7-4 Troubleshooting Chart Rotation Failure Symptoms ................................................................................167
Table 7-5 Troubleshooting Erratic Pen Movement Symptoms ................................................................................168
Table 7-6 Procedure for Pen Alignment...................................................................................................................169
Table 8-1 Procedure for Identifying the Software Version ......................................................................................173
Table 8-2 Power-Up Diagnostic Tests......................................................................................................................174
Table 8-3 Procedure for Displaying the Results of Self-Diagnostics.......................................................................175
Table 8-4 Error Messages.........................................................................................................................................177
Table 8-5 Observable Symptoms of Failure.............................................................................................................179
Table 8-6 Troubleshooting Recorder Failure Symptoms .........................................................................................181
Table 8-7 Troubleshooting Pen Trace Failure Symptoms........................................................................................182
Table 8-8 Troubleshooting Chart Rotation Failure Symptoms ................................................................................183
Table 8-9 Troubleshooting Erratic Pen Movement Symptoms ................................................................................184
Table 8-10 Troubleshooting Keypad and/or Display Failure Symptoms.................................................................184
Table 8-11 Troubleshooting Relay Output Failure Symptoms.................................................................................185
Table 8-12 Troubleshooting External Alarm Function Failure Symptoms ..............................................................186
Table 8-13 Troubleshooting Remote Switch (Digital Input) Function Failure Symptoms ......................................186
Table 8-14 Troubleshooting Modbus Communications...........................................................................................187
Table 8-15 Procedure for Aligning Pen at Zero and Span .......................................................................................188
Table 9-1 Door Assembly Parts................................................................................................................................192
Table 9-2 Chart Plate Assembly Parts......................................................................................................................193
Table 9-3 Basic Recorder Parts ................................................................................................................................195
Table A-1 Typical Reference Accuracy ...................................................................................................................200
Table B-1 10-inch Single Range Chart Part Numbers..............................................................................................203
Table B-2 10-inch Dual Range Chart Part Numbers................................................................................................208
Table C-1 Prompt Hierarchy and Available Selections............................................................................................218
Table C-2 Run/Monitor Functions ...........................................................................................................................221
Table D-1 Procedure for Starting Accutune II .........................................................................................................226
Table D-2 Procedure for Using Accutune for Duplex Control ................................................................................227
x
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
12/03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Figures
Figure 1-1 Guide to Manual’s Organization...............................................................................................................10
Figure 2-1 Overall Dimensions ..................................................................................................................................15
Figure 2-2 Plug Locations ..........................................................................................................................................16
Figure 2-3 Mounting Flush in a New Panel Cutout (Rear View)...............................................................................17
Figure 2-4 Panel Mounting Recorder with NEMA4 or Heavy Duty Door ................................................................19
Figure 2-5 Pipe Mounting Brackets............................................................................................................................20
Figure 2-6 Mounting Flush on a Surface of Panel or Wall (Rear View)....................................................................22
Figure 2-7 Recommended Wiring Routing - Models Without CE Mark ...................................................................24
Figure 2-8 Recommended Wiring Routing - Models With CE Mark ........................................................................25
Figure 2-9 Power Wiring – Models Without CE Mark..............................................................................................29
Figure 2-10 Power Wiring – Models With CE Mark .................................................................................................30
Figure 2-11 Analog Input Wiring...............................................................................................................................32
Figure 2-12 Digital Input Wiring ...............................................................................................................................34
Figure 2-13 Communication Wiring ..........................................................................................................................36
Figure 2-14 Relay Output Wiring...............................................................................................................................39
Figure 2-15 Open Collector Output Wiring ...............................................................................................................40
Figure 2-16 Current Output Wiring............................................................................................................................42
Figure 2-17 Transmitter Power Out Wiring ...............................................................................................................44
Figure 3-1 Location of Configuration and Input Switches.........................................................................................47
Figure 3-2 Sample Chart for Single Pen Recorder.....................................................................................................48
Figure 3-3 Basic Chart Plate Components..................................................................................................................66
Figure 3-4 Typical Step Test Chart Patterns...............................................................................................................68
Figure 3-5 Setting Chart Time to Time Index ............................................................................................................69
Figure 4-1 Operator Interface.....................................................................................................................................72
Figure 4-2 Prompt Hierarchy......................................................................................................................................75
Figure 4-3 Location of Switches and Relays..............................................................................................................82
Figure 4-4 Basic Chart Plate Components................................................................................................................120
Figure 4-5 Typical Step Test Chart Patterns.............................................................................................................122
Figure 4-6 Setting Chart Time to Time Index ..........................................................................................................123
Figure 4-7 Operator Interface...................................................................................................................................128
Figure 5-1 Location of the Input Connections on the Input Boards.........................................................................145
Figure 5-2 Calibration Set Up Diagram for Thermocouple Inputs Using a Compensated Calibrator.....................147
Figure 5-3 Calibration Set Up Diagram for Thermocouple Inputs Using an Ice Bath.............................................148
Figure 5-4 Calibration Set Up Diagram for RTD Inputs..........................................................................................149
Figure 5-5 Calibration Set Up Diagram for Millivolts, Volts, and Milliamps Inputs...............................................150
Figure 5-6 Test Equipment Connections for Calibrating Current Output ................................................................153
Figure 6-1 Replacing the Chart and Ink Cartridge ...................................................................................................158
Figure 9-1 Door Assembly .......................................................................................................................................192
Figure 9-2 Chart Plate Assembly..............................................................................................................................193
Figure 9-3 Recorder Components.............................................................................................................................194
Figure 9-4 DR4300 Recorder (CE Mark) – Internal Cabling Diagram....................................................................196
Figure 9-5 DR4300 Recorder (Non-CE Mark) – Internal Cabling Diagram............................................................197
Figure C-1 Ramp/Soak Profile Example..................................................................................................................214
12/03
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
xi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder
xii
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
12/03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview
1. Overview
1.1 Introduction
Function
The DR4300 recorder is a one or two pen microprocessor-based circular chart recorder. The basic DR4301
(one pen) and DR4302 (two pen) recorders provide reliable, convenient pen-drawn analog traces on
preprinted 10 inch (250 mm) charts. Both the chart and the pens are driven by stepper motors controlled by
the microprocessor. Chart speed and range are configurable. The basic recorder is also available in CE
models DR4321 (one pen) and DR4322 (two pen).
In addition to generating pen-drawn chart traces, the DR4311 (one pen) and DR4312 (two pen) models
include a display and keypad. This option lets you display the real time value of the process variable for
each pen channel, as well as other values. The recorder with display and keypad is also available in CE
models DR4331 (one pen) and DR4332 (two pen).
Each pen channel has its own printed circuit assembly (PCA), allowing the channels to operate
independently.
CE conformity (Europe)
Indicated models of this product are in conformity with the protection requirements of the following
European Council Directives: 73/23/EEC, the Low Voltage Directive, and 89/336/EEC, the EMC
Directive. Conformity of this product with any other “CE Mark” Directive(s) shall not be assumed.
Deviation from the installation conditions specified in this manual, and the special conditions for CE
conformity in Section 2 of this manual, may invalidate this product’s conformity with the Low Voltage and
EMC Directives.
Analog inputs
The input for each pen channel can be one of any standard electrical signal: milliamp, millivolt, voltage,
RTD, or thermocouple. The input type and range are configurable. In the models having display and
keypad the range can be expanded and compressed to meet specific measurement needs. The display and
keypad also permit entry of input bias and filter values. (The input filter for the models without a display is
fixed at one second; their bias is zero.)
Digital inputs
Two digital inputs for each pen channel are available as an option. These inputs can be used to trigger the
switchover to a second control setpoint or a pre-configured constant output if an external event causes
contact closure (sets the digital input to ON). In addition, the digital inputs can be used to remotely reset
the optional totalizer or limit controller.
12/03
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder
Communications
The Modbus communication option permits configuration of the unit and monitoring of process variables
over a standard multi-drop serial communications link.
Relay outputs for control and alarms
The models with display and keypad are available with output relays, two for each pen channel. These
relays can be wired for Normally Open (NO) and Normally Closed (NC) terminals. ON-OFF control can
be performed using one relay (relay simplex control) or two relays (relay duplex control).
Any relay not used for control is available for alarming. Two alarm setpoints can be configured for each
alarm relay. An adjustable hysteresis of 0.0 % to 100.0 % is configurable for the alarm setpoint.
Analog output for control or retransmission
Depending on the model ordered, a 4 to 20 mA current output may be available for control or
retransmission of a process variable (“auxiliary output”).
Failsafe operation
The control function can operate in automatic or manual mode. In automatic the control function works to
maintain the process variable at the setpoint entered locally by the operator. During configuration a
“failsafe” value can be specified. This value is used as the output at power up and in case of input failure
during automatic operation. (When the unit goes to failsafe, the control function goes to manual mode.)
In manual mode the operator enters the output locally. If the recorder has gone to failsafe operation, the
operator will be able to change the output value from the failsafe value specified during configuration.
Timer and totalizer options
The recorder is available with timer and totalizer options. The timer can be started locally, remotely, or by
an alarm. The unit can be configured to display elapsed time or time remaining. At the end of the timeout
period Relay 2 is energized, and remains energized until the timer is reset. The totalizer can be reset
locally or remotely; its displayed value can be scaled.
Setpoint Programming Option
The recorder is available with a Setpoint Program option. This feature allows configuration of up to four
setpoint programs using a total of twenty-four ramp and soak segments. A setpoint and time is configured
for each segment. The program can be set up to include guaranteed soak segments. A plus/minus
deviation is configured for all soak segments. Whenever the plus/minus deviation is exceeded, soak timing
is frozen.
Display and keypad
In addition to process variables, the display can show output, setpoint, and deviation real time values if the
recorder is equipped with optional outputs. The upper display uses four characters to display the input
value. The lower display shows other parameters using a two- or three-character label and four- or three-
digit values. In addition, status and error messages flash on the lower display when necessary.
2
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
12/03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview
The six keys are used to select the real time value to be displayed, and to select set up parameters and their
values during configuration. The display and keypad are behind the door, protecting them from dirt.
A supplementary external keypad is also available.
For more information about the operator interface on models having a display and keypad, see Subsection
4.2.
Configuration
The models without a display are configured with two switchbanks: one for configuration, the other for
input definition. Configuration is a simple matter of consulting a table in this manual; selecting the
appropriate combination of range, chart speed, engineering unit, and input type; then setting the switches as
shown in the table.
The display and keypad are used to configure models with these options. When the unit is in configuration
mode, set up parameters are displayed, and grouped by function. Designate site-specific values by selecting
them from a list of choices, or entering them as numeric values. The operator can be locked out from
making configuration changes.
The models with display also use a switchbank to define the type of input to be expected by the hardware.
Input parameters used by the software are configured using the display and keypad.
Self-diagnostics
All DR4300 recorders run self-diagnostics at power up and in the background during normal operation.
Problems are reported by error messages on the display when present. An LED in the models without a
display lights if the unit fails a self-diagnostic.
Construction
All DR4300 recorders are housed in a rugged molded case which can be panel-, pipe- or surface-mounted.
An acrylic-windowed, gasketed door protects internal components from harsh environments while
allowing easy access to the chart.
12/03
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder
1.2 Model Number Breakdown
Introduction
The model number breakdown is presented in the tables that follow. Note that not all options are available
with all recorders. Check the “Availability” column for each model. A star () in the Availability column
means unrestricted availability of the feature for that model. N/A indicates the feature is not available for
that model. A letter in the Availability column denotes restricted availability. The meaning of each letter is
provided at the bottom of this page.
The Notes referred to in the tables are also at the end of this subsection.
Model number format
The basic model number consists of a key number. Appended to this key number are characters that
identify the features in various categories. The meaning of the characters in each category is presented in a
table identified below.
Key Number Table I
DR43_ _ - _ _ _ _ - _ _ _ _ _ - _ _ _ _ - _ _ _ _ - _ _
Table II Table III Table IV Table V Table VI
000
-
Key numbers
The base model numbers for the DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder are:
One Pen Recorder (Basic Recorder Without Display)
Two Pen Recorder (Basic Recorder Without Display)
One Pen Recorder (With Display)
DR4301
DR4302
DR4311
DR4312
Two Pen Recorder (With Display)
One Pen Recorder (Basic Recorder Without Display, With CE Mark) DR4321
Two Pen Recorder (Basic Recorder Without Display, With CE Mark) DR4322
One Pen Recorder (With Display, With CE Mark)
Two Pen Recorder (With Display, With CE Mark)
DR4331
DR4332
Restricted availability designations
d = Not available with Table I selection XX0X.
e = Not available with Table I selection XXX0.
f = Not available with Table I selection 0XXX.
g = Not available with Table I selection 0000.
h = Not available with Table I selections FXXX, XFXX, GXXX, XGXX.
j = Not available with Table I selection 0XXX.
k = Not available with Table I selection X0XX.
m = Not available with Table I selections 2XXX, 3XXX, 4XXX, 5XXX, AXXX, XXX0.
n = Not available with Table II selection SXXXX.
p = Not available with Table II selections RXXXX, SXXXX.
q = Not available with Table II selections GXXXX, BXXXX, HXXXX, CXXXX, KXXXX, LXXXX.
4
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
12/03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview
Model Number Table I - OUTPUT
Model No.
Description
Availability
4301
4321
4302
4322
4311
4331
4312
4332
Pen One
d
d
d
d
d
d
d
d
d
d
d
d
d
d
None
0 _ _ _
2 _ _ _
2 Outputs (Alarm/On-Off Control)
1 PID Control with Accutune II
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
(see Note 1)
3 _ _ _
4 _ _ _
5 _ _ _
A _ _ _
F _ _ _
G _ _ _
1 PID Control/Setpoint Program/Timer(see Note 1)
2 Outputs (Alarm 1 and Timer)
4 to 20 mA Retransmission Output
FM Approved Limit Control
(see Note 4)
FM Approved Limt Control/Timer Output
Pen Two
e
None
_ 0 _ _
_ 2 _ _
_3 _ _
2 Outputs (Alarm/On-Off Control)
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
1 PID Control with Accutune II
(see Note 1)
e
1 PID Control/Setpoint Program/Timer(see Note 1)
2 Outputs (Alarm 1 and Timer)
_ 4 _ _
_ 5 _ _
_ A _ _
_ F _ _
_ G _ _
e
e
4 to 20 mA Retransmission Output
FM Approved Limit Control
(see Note 4)
e
m
m
FM Approved Limt Control/Timer Output
Output Type Pen 1
None
_ _ 0 _
_ _ E _
_ _ S _
_ _ T _
Electromechanical Relay
Solid State Relay
Open Collector
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
j
j
j
j
j
j
Output Type Pen 2
None
k
_ _ _ 0
_ _ _ E
_ _ _ S
_ _ _ T
Electromechanical Relay
Solid State Relay
Open Collector
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
k
k
12/03
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder
Model Number Table II - INSTRUMENT OPTIONS
Description
Model No.
Availability
4301
4321
4302
4322
4311
4331
4312
4332
Door Options
Gray Door
G _ _ _ _
B _ _ _ _
H _ _ _ _
C _ _ _ _
K _ _ _ _
L _ _ _ _
R _ _ _ _
S _ _ _ _
_ 0 _ _ _
_ A _ _ _
_ B _ _ _
_ K _ _ _
Blue Door
Gray Door with External Keypad
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Blue Door with External Keypad
Black Door
Black Door with External Keypad
SST Door
N/A
N/A
NEMA 4 SST Door
Standard Latch
n
q
n
q
n
q
n
q
Keyed Latch
Keyed Latch/Chart Plate Seal
Door Lock
p
p
p
p
Instrument Power/Transmitter Power
Universal Recorder Power
_ _ 1 _ _
_ _ 3 _ _
Universal Power +24 Vdc Transmitter Power
Communications
None
_ _ _ 0 _
_ _ _ C _
RS485 Modbus RTU Communication (see Note 5)
Product Configuration
Standard
_ _ _ _ 0
_ _ _ _ 1
Configuration for Non-Standard Range Settings
N/A
N/A
(see Note 6)
Configuration for Customer's Specific Data
_ _ _ _ 2
N/A
N/A
(see Note 6)
6
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
12/03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview
Model Number Table III - PEN 1 OPTIONS
Description
Model No.
Availability
4301
4321
4302
4322
4311
4331
4312
4332
N/A
N/A
f
g
No Digital Inputs
Digital Inputs
None
0 _ _ _
D _ _ _
_ 0 _ _
_ _ 0 _
_ _ T _
_ _ _ 0
(See Note 3)
h
h
No Totalizer Function
Totalizer
N/A
N/A
Future
Model Number Table IV - PEN 2 OPTIONS
Description
Model No.
Availability
4301
4321
4302
4322
4311
4331
4312
4332
N/A
N/A
N/A
g
No Digital Inputs
Digital Inputs
None
0 _ _ _
D _ _ _
_ 0 _ _
_ _ 0 _
_ _ T _
_ _ _ 0
(See Note 3)
h
No Totalizer Function
Totalizer
N/A
N/A
N/A
Future
Model Number Table V - APPROVALS/CERTIFICATES
Description
Model No.
Availability
4301
4321
4302
4322
4311
4331
4312
4332
n
n
n
n
No Approvals
0 _
U _
C _
B _
_ 0
_ 1
_ 2
_ 3
UL Listing
CSA Certification
n
n
n
n
UL and CSA Approved
No Certificate
n
n
n
n
Certificate of Conformance (F3391)
Certificate of Calibration (F3399)
(See Note 2)
Certificate of Conformance and Calibration
(See Note 2)
12/03
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder
NOTE 1: PID control options include current output plus two discrete outputs for alarms. If ON-OFF or
time-proportioned simplex control is used, only one discrete output is available for an alarm.
Time-proportioned duplex control requires the use of both outputs and therefore no relay
outputs are available for alarms on that pen channel. Accutune II tuning is a standard feature
with PID control options.
NOTE 2: Customer must supply the input actuation and range information for each input in the Free Form
section of the order to have the unit supplied with a Certificate of Calibration.
NOTE 3: Digital Inputs are only available when ordering outputs in Table I.
NOTE 4: 4 to 20 mA Retransmission Output includes two outputs per pen for alarms. You must specify
the type of alarm outputs required (i.e., Relay, SS Relay, Open Collector Outputs).
NOTE 5: On key numbers DR4301, DR4302, DR4321, and DR4322 the communication address is fixed;
the display assembly is required to change it. Only one DR4301 or DR4321 instrument, or only
one pen of a DR4302 or DR4322 can exist on the network, otherwise communication conflicts
will exist. Pen 1 is the default when communications is specified on these models.
NOTE 6: Recorder is supplied with one box of 30755820-001, 0 to 100 Even "starter" charts. For special
range configuration on the DR4301, DR4302, DR4321, or DR4322 Recorder, provide the Input
Type, Chart Range, Chart Speed, °C or °F, Engineering Units, Linear or Non-Linear Chart Type
when ordering.
For example: Pen 1: "J" Thermocouple, 0-375 °F, 7-Day Linear Chart
Pen 2: 4-20 mA, 0-1000, 7-Day Linear Chart
For configuration on Models DR4311, DR4312, DR4331, and DR4332, the customer must
supply completed "Configuration Worksheets" with order for units to be Factory configured.
8
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
12/03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview
1.3 About This Manual
All models described
This manual contains instructions for installation, set up, startup, operation, troubleshooting, and repair of
•
•
basic version without display: DR4301, DR4302, DR4321, and DR4322
enhanced version with display: DR4311, DR4312, DR4331, and DR4332
Some sections in the manual apply to all models, while others contain information specific to one of these
two categories. Unless a section’s title refers to recorders “without display” or “with display”, the
information in the section applies to all models. To see which sections apply to your recorder, see Figure
12/03
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder
SECTION
1 - Overview
SECTION
2 - Installation
SECTION
SECTION
3 - Configuration, Startup, and
4 - Configuration, Startup, and
Operation of Recorder
Display
Operation of Recorder Display
without
with
SECTION
5 - Input and Output
Calibration for Recorder Display
with
SECTION
6 - Routine Maintenance
Trouble?
SECTION
SECTION
7 - Troubleshooting and Pen
8 - Troubleshooting and Pen
Alignment of Recorder
Display
Alignment of Recorder Display
without
with
SECTION
9 - Parts List
Options
APPENDIX C -
Setpoint Ramp/Soak
Programming and Operation
APPENDIX D -
Using Accutune II
24209
Figure 1-1 Guide to Manual’s Organization
10
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
12/03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installation
2. Installation
2.1 Overview
Introduction
Installation of the DR4300 recorder consists of mounting and wiring the recorder according to the
instructions given in this section.
Read the pre-installation information below, check the model number interpretation in Section 1, and
become familiar with your model selections, then proceed with installation.
What’s in this section?
The following is a list of topics in this section.
Topic
See Page
2.1 Overview
2.2 Mounting Considerations and Overall Dimensions
2.3 Mounting Methods
2.4 Wiring Prerequisites
2.5 Input Wiring
2.6 Output Wiring
Pre-installation information
If the recorder has not been removed from its shipping carton, inspect the carton for damage and remove
the recorder. Inspect the unit for any obvious shipping damage and report any damage due to transit to the
carrier.
•
•
Make sure a bag containing mounting hardware is included in the carton with the recorder.
Check that the model number shown on the chart plate agrees with what you have ordered.
12/03
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder
Operating limits
We recommend that you review and adhere to the operating limits listed in Table 2-1 when you install your
recorder.
Table 2-1 Operating Limits and Condensed Specifications
Specifications
Condition
Accuracy
See Appendix A
Ambient Temperature
Relative Humidity
0 °C to 55 °C [32 °F to 131 °F]
5 % to 90 % RH at 40 °C [104 °F]
Vibration
Frequency
Acceleration
0 to 200 Hz
0.5 g
Mechanical Shock
Acceleration
Duration
5 g
30 ms
Mounting Position from
Vertical
Tilted Forward
Tilted Backward
Tilted to side (±)
5°
90°
20°
Power
Voltage (ac/dc)
100 Vac to 240 Vac
or
20 Vac/Vdc to 27 Vac/Vdc
49 Hz to 61 Hz
Frequency (Hz)
Power Consumption
Type of Actuations
20 Watts maximum
Thermocouple: B, E, E (low), J, J (low), K, K (low), Ni-Ni Moly, Nicrosil-Nisil, R, S,
T, T (low), W5W26
RTD: Platinum 100 ohms*, 100 ohms (low)*, 100 ohms**
Linear: 4-20 mA dc, 0-20 mA dc, 0-10 mV dc, 0-100 mV dc, 0-200 mV dc, 0-1 Vdc,
0-2 Vdc, 0-5 Vdc, 0-10 Vdc, 1-5 Vdc, 2-10 Vdc
Digital: +24 Vdc source for external dry contacts or isolated solid state contacts
*IEC Alpha = 0.00385
**Alpha = 0.00391
Minimum Input Span
Input Impedance
Range is fully configurable within span limitation of the sensing element.
mA dc: 250 ohms
Vdc: 200K ohms
RTD: 13.3 K ohms
All others: 10 Megohms
Span Step Response Time
Reproducibility
7 seconds maximum
0.1 percent of span
Sampling Rate
Input sampled 3 times per second
12
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
12/03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installation
Condition
Input Filter
Specifications
Without Display: Analog with time constant of 3 seconds and digital with time
constant of 1 second.
With Display: Analog with time constant of 3 seconds and digital adjustable 0
seconds to 120 seconds.
Case
Pen
Molded, foamed-Noryl with gasketed door to meet NEMA 3 enclosure
requirements.
Disposable fiber-tip ink cartridge, line length per cartridge more than 305 m
[1000 ft]
One Pen: Purple
Two Pen: Purple (pen 1) and red (pen 2)
NOTE: Only pen 1 (purple) is referenced to the chart time line.
Chart
262 mm [10.32-inch] diameter chart with standard preprinted markings and a
calibrated width of 100 mm [4 inches].
Wiring Connections
Color
Screw terminals (2 piece)
Case: Black
Door: Standard—Gray; Optional—Carribean blue or black
Weight
5.4 kg [12 lbs]
Mounting
Panel-, pipe- or surface-mounted
Installation Category
(Overvoltage Category)
Category II: Energy-consuming Equipment Supplied from the Fixed Installation,
Local Level Appliances, and Industrial Control Equipment (EN61010-1).
Pollution Degree
Pollution Degree 2: Normally Non-conductive Pollution with Occasional
Conductivity Caused by Condensation (Ref. IEC 664-1).
EMC Classification
Dielectric Insulation
Group 1, Class A: ISM Equipment (EN55011, emissions), Industrial Equipment
(EN50082-2, Immunity).
AC Main to Inputs/Outputs
Input to Input
250 Vac
250 Vac
250 Vac
Input to Output
(except Digital Input to Current Output)
AC Main to Transmitter Power
250 Vac
Options
Current Output (Isolated)
Range can be set anywhere between 4 mA and 21 mA, and as direct or reverse
action.
Resolution: 11 bits for 4 mA to 21 mA
Accuracy: 0.5 % full scale
Temperature Stability: 0.1 % F.S./°C
Load Resistance: 0 ohms to 600 ohms
Electromechanical Relay
Output
SPDT contacts. Internally socketed.
Resistive Load: 5 A @ 120 Vac or 2.5 A @ 240 Vac or 30 Vdc.
Inductive Load: 50 VA @ 120 Vac or 240 Vac.
Motor: 1/6 H.P.
12/03
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder
Condition
Specifications
Solid State Relay Output
SPST solid state contacts consisting of a triac NO output.
Internally socketed.
Resistive Load: 1.0 A @ 25 °C for 120 Vac or 240 Vac.
0.5 A @ 55 °C for 120 Vac or 240 Vac.
Inductive Load: 50 VA @ 120 Vac or 240 Vac.
Open Collector Output
Modbus Communication
Maximum Sink Current: 20 mA
Internally powered @ 30 Vdc
Opto-isolated from all other circuits except current output, but not from each other.
Socketed jumper assembly replaces relay.
Baud Rate: 19,200 maximum, configurable for models with display;
fixed at 9,600 for models without display
Protocol: Modbus
Length of Link: 1,219 m [4,000 ft] maximum
Link Characteristics: Two-wire, multidrop
Digital Inputs
(Supply common with
current output)
+24 Vdc source for external dry contacts or isolated solid state contacts for either
of the two inputs.
On contact closure the recorder will respond according to how each digital input is
configured. Opening contact causes return to previous state.
Transmitter Power
24 Vdc with adjustment of ± 6 % (22.6 to 25.4)
100 mA maximum output
14
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
12/03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installation
2.2 Mounting Considerations and Overall Dimensions
Physical considerations
The recorder can be mounted flush in a panel or on the surface of a panel or wall using the mounting kit
supplied with the recorder. Adequate access space must be available at the back of the panel for installation
and servicing.
A kit for mounting the unit on a pipe is available (see Section 9 Parts List).
Overall dimensions
The overall dimensions and panel cutout requirements for mounting the recorder are shown in Figure 2-1.
Left Side View
Millimetres
Dimensions:
Inches
28.6
Max. panel
thickness 1.125
41.3
1.6
Front View
23
0.9
Latch
Bottom View
355.6
14.0
320.5
12.6
320.5
12.6
17.5
0.6
147.8
5.8
355.6
14.0
14.5
:
Short wing latch
0.57
5
0.19
:
Double bit latch
369.6
14.5
196.2
7.7
322.56
12.70
163.2
6.4
181.3
7.1
322.56
12.70
Panel
Cutout
Surface
Mounting
24210
Rear View
Figure 2-1 Overall Dimensions
12/03
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder
2.3 Mounting Methods
2.3.1 Introduction
Overview
This section provides instructions for mounting the recorder using one of the following methods:
•
•
•
Flush in a panel (Subsection 2.3.2)
Flush in a panel for recorders with NEMA4 or Heavy Duty door (Subsection 2.3.3)
On a 2-inch pipe (Subsection 2.3.4)
[A pipe mounting kit is available (see Section 9 Parts List).]
•
Choose the method that meets your mounting requirements. Use the associated dimension drawings for
reference.
How to remove knockouts for conduits
Before you mount the recorder, remove the appropriate plugs in the bottom and/or sides of the recorder
Side View
Bottom View
24211
Figure 2-2 Plug Locations
16
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
12/03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installation
2.3.2 Mounting Flush in Panel (New Panel Cutout)
Procedure
Refer to Figure 2-3 and follow the procedure in Table 2-2 to make a new cutout in a panel and mount your
recorder in the cutout.
Table 2-2 Mounting Flush in a New Panel Cutout
Step
1
Action
At the appropriate location, make a square cutout in the panel. Cutout dimensions should be
322.56 mm ± 1.52 mm x 322.56 mm ± 1.52 mm [12.7 in ± 0.060 in x 12.7 in ± 0.060 in]. See
Orient the recorder case properly and slide it into the cutout from the front of the panel.
Support the recorder as shown in Steps 3 and 4.
2
3
Refer to Figure 2-3. From the back of the panel, attach a mounting bracket to each side of the
recorder case using a 1/4-20 x 1/2-inch hex screw for each bracket (mounting hardware
supplied with recorder). Leave the screws slightly loose so you can adjust the brackets.
While holding the recorder firmly against the panel, slide each bracket against the back of the
panel and tighten the screws.
4
Hex screw,
1/4-20 x
1/2 inch and
washer
21406
Figure 2-3 Mounting Flush in a New Panel Cutout (Rear View)
12/03
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder
2.3.3 Panel Mounting Recorder with NEMA4 or Heavy Duty door
Refer to Figure 2-4 and follow the procedure in Table 2-3 to panel mount your recorder if it has a NEMA4
or Heavy Duty door.
Table 2-3 Procedure for Mounting Recorder with NEMA4 or Heavy Duty Door
Step
1
Action
Place the panel gasket onto the rear flange of the recorder case.
2
Install four #8-32 screws on each of the three mounting brackets so the ends of the screw
threads are flush with the face of the bracket.
NOTE: Screw heads to be flange side of brackets.
Insert the case with gasket into the panel opening.
3
4
Install one left hand and one right hand bracket with 1/4 x 3/8 long bolts and lockwashers on
each side of the case.
NOTE: The notch on each bracket should be facing upward towards the top of the unit.
Do not tighten the hex bolts at this time.
5
6
Install the remaining right hand bracket on the top with the 1/4 x 3/4 long bolt and lockwasher.
Do not tighten the bolt at this time.
Place a screwdriver blade on the notch of each bracket and firmly tap so that each bracket
firmly mates the case with gasket to the panel.
NOTE: Keep brackets parallel to case. Tighten the three 1/4 hex bolts to hold the brackets in
place.
7
Start to tighten the #8-32 x 1/2 screws on the right side bracket. Alternate screws at opposite
ends until all four screws have a minimum of 10 lb-in of torque applied. Do the same to both
the left side and top brackets.
When completed all twelve screws should have a minimum of 10 lb-in of torque applied. This
assures the case and panel gasket are adequately sealed against the panel.
18
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
12/03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installation
Hex Head Bolt
1/4-20 x 3/4 inch
Notch
Bracket
Pan Head Screw
8-32 x 1/2 inch
Hex Head Bolt
1/4-20 x 3/8 inch
Side View
NOTE: Mounting brackets and attaching hardware are included in kit 30755065-502;
panel gasket supplied in kit 51197657-501.
Figure 2-4 Panel Mounting Recorder with NEMA4 or Heavy Duty Door
12/03
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder
2.3.4 Mounting on a 2-inch pipe
Table 2-4 Pipe Mounting Procedure
Step
1
Action
Using the eight plastite screws supplied with the pipe mounting bracket kit, attach the two
mounting brackets (flat side against the case) to the back of the recorder. Refer to Figure 2-5
for location.
2
3
Position the recorder with brackets on the 2-inch pipe.
Install the U-bolts around the pipe and through the bracket holes. Secure with lockwashers and
hex nuts provided.
Pipe Mounting
Bracket
Washer
Plastite
Screw
Hex Nut
Rear
of
Case
U-bolt
24224
Figure 2-5 Pipe Mounting Brackets
20
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
12/03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installation
2.3.5 Mounting on Surface (of Panel or Wall)
Procedure
Refer to Figure 2-6 and follow the procedure in Table 2-5 to mount your recorder on a surface (panel or
wall).
ATTENTION
Three (3) screws must be supplied by the user for attaching the mounting hardware (brackets and
support hook) to panel or wall.
Table 2-5 Mounting Flush on a Surface (of Panel or Wall)
Step
1
Action
Using two flat-head 10-32 x 1/4-inch screws supplied with the recorder, fasten the support
hook into the recess at the back of the recorder case as shown in Figure 2-6.
Using 1/4-20 x 1/2-inch hex screws and lockwashers, attach a mounting bracket to each side
of the case. Leave the screws slightly loose so as to permit some adjustments of the
brackets.
2
On the panel, mark the locations for the three holes, as shown by the hole pattern in Figure
3
4
5
6
Using a drill of appropriate size for user-supplied screws, drill a hole in the front of the panel
for the eye of the support hook.
Insert the screws for the support hook into the panel, allowing the screw head to protrude
approximately 5/16-inch.
Hang the recorder support hook on the screw. Make sure that the locations for the other two
holes (marked in Step 3) are correct. If not, make sure that the recorder is aligned vertically,
and use the brackets as templates to mark the proper locations.
Remove the recorder from the panel and drill the other two holes.
7
8
Hang the recorder on the screw by the support hook and insert the other two user-supplied
screws through the brackets into the panel. Tighten the two hex screws that attach the
brackets to the case.
12/03
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder
NOTE:
Hole Pattern
Reference:
millimeters
inches
These screws must be supplied by
user; all other mounting hardware
is supplied with recorder.
Support
hook
369.6
14.550
196.22
7.725
181.36
7.14
163.32
6.430
18.03
0.710
21409
Figure 2-6 Mounting Flush on a Surface of Panel or Wall (Rear View)
2.4 Wiring Prerequisites
ATTENTION
Wiring should be performed by qualified personnel.
Electrical considerations
The recorder is considered “rack and panel mounted equipment” per EN 61010-1, Safety Requirements for
Electrical Equipment for Measurement, Control, and Laboratory Use, Part 1: General Requirements.
!
Recorder grounding
PROTECTIVE EARTH (GROUND)
Grounding of this recorder shall be in accordance with national and local electrical codes.
NOISELESS (CLEAN) EARTH (GROUND)
To minimize electrical noise and transients that may adversely affect the recorder, connection of the
recorder terminal (located in the rear of the case) to a local earth (ground) using a No. 11 (4 mm2) braided
copper conductor is recommended.
22
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
12/03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installation
Taking electrical noise precautions
Electrical noise is composed of unabated electrical signals which produce undesirable effects in
measurement and control circuits.
Digital equipment is especially sensitive to the effects of electrical noise. Your recorder has built-in circuits
to reduce the effect of electrical noise from various sources. If there is a need to further reduce these
effects:
•
individual bundles through separate conduits or metal trays.
•
Use Suppression Devices—For additional noise protection, you may want to add suppression
devices at the external source. Appropriate suppression devices are commercially available.
For additional noise information, refer to document 51-52-05-01, How to Apply Digital Instrumentation in
Severe Electrical Noise Environments.
CE conformity special conditions (Europe)
Shielded cables with a drain wire are required for all input and output cables. All instrument shielded
cable drain wires must be connected to a low impedance earth ground at the entry fitting. Cable/conduit
entry fittings shall effectively terminate the cable shield connecting the shield to the enclosure conductive
coating. The shielded cable shield shall not extend into the instrument closure.
12/03
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder
Recommended wiring routing
recommended use of these points of entry for various types of wiring, refer to Figure 2-7 and Figure 2-8.
Recommended Wiring Locations for Models without CE Mark
J3
24 V Power Supply
RS485/422
Communications
Communications
Printed Circuit Board
Pen 2 Main
Printed Circuit Board
Pen 1 Main
Printed Circuit Board
TB2
TB2
TB1
TB1
P3D
TB3
Digital Input Board
TB4
Digital Input Board
TB5
P3D
TB4 TB3
TB5
L
Inputs 1 and 2
N
24818
Relay/Alarm
Outputs
A.C. Mains
(Integral wiring
Digital Inputs 1 and 2
to TB1)
Current Outputs 1 and 2
and 24 V Power Supply
Figure 2-7 Recommended Wiring Routing - Models Without CE Mark
24
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
12/03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installation
Recommended Wiring Locations for CE Mark Models
J3
RS485/422
Communications
24 V Power Supply
Communications
Printed Circuit Board
Pen 2 Main
Pen 1 Main
Printed Circuit Board
Printed Circuit Board
TB2
TB2
TB1
TB1
P3D
Digital Input Board
Digital Input Board
P3D
TB3
TB3
TB4
TB4
TB5
TB5
Relay/Alarm
Outputs
Inputs 1 and 2
Filter
A CAssembly
24819
A.C. Mains and
Ground Wire
Digital Inputs 1 and 2
Current Outputs 1 and 2
and 24 V Power Supply
1
1
A braided copper shield shall be connected to ground (green screw on the filter assembly).
A separate braided copper shield shall be used to connect
on rear of case to chassis ground
Figure 2-8 Recommended Wiring Routing - Models With CE Mark
12/03
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder
Wire bundling recommendations
which wire functions may usually be bundled together. Do not bundle together wires from different
categories.
Table 2-6 Wiring Bundling Categories
Category
Wire Functions
1
•
•
•
•
Line power wiring
Earth ground wiring
Control relay output wiring
Line voltage alarm wiring
2
Analog signal wire, such as:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Input signal wire (thermocouple, 4 to 20 mA, etc.)
4-20 mA output signal wiring
Digital input wiring
Communication wiring
Transmitter power out wiring
3
Low voltage alarm relay output wiring
Low voltage wiring to solid state type control circuits
Wiring diagrams
To determine the appropriate diagrams for wiring your recorder, refer to the model number interpretation
in Section 1 - Overview. The model number of the recorder can be found on the chart plate.
Using the information contained in the model number, select the appropriate wiring diagrams from the
figures listed in Table 2-7 and wire the recorder accordingly.
Table 2-7 Wiring Illustrations
Wiring Requirements
Power Wiring - Models Without CE Mark
See
Power Wiring - Models With CE Mark
Analog Input Wiring
Digital Input Wiring
Communication Wiring
Relay Output Wiring
Open Collector Relay Output Wiring
Current Output Wiring
Transmitter Power Out Wiring
26
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
12/03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installation
2.5 Input Wiring
Introduction
This section describes procedures for wiring power, analog inputs, optional digital inputs, and the optional
communication link.
2.5.1 Power Wiring
Introduction
Recorder models are available for use with 100 to 240 Vac or 20 Vdc to 27 Vdc power. (See Model
Number in Section 1 Overview.)
Procedure
The procedure to connect power wiring is in Table 2-8.
•
•
•
•
Figure 2-9 for models without CE Mark.
Figure 2-10 for models with CE Mark.
WARNING
SHOCK HAZARD
Be sure that the line voltage is OFF before connecting the power wires to the recorder.
Failure to observe this precaution can result in serious personal injury or death.
CAUTION
This equipment is suitable for connection to 100 to 240 Vac (49 to 61 Hz) or 20 to 27 Vac/Vdc power
supply mains. It is the user’s responsibility to provide a switch and non-time delay (North America),
quick-acting, high breaking capacity, Type F, (Europe) 1/2 A, 250 V fuse(s) or circuit-breaker as part
of the installation. The switch or circuit-breaker shall be located in close proximity to the recorder,
within easy reach of the operator. The switch or circuit-breaker shall be marked as the
disconnecting device for the recorder.
!
12/03
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder
Table 2-8 Procedure for Power Wiring Models
Action
Step
Open the recorder door. Loosen the captive screw in the chart plate and swing the plate out.
Locate the power terminal block for your recorder model.
1
2
Note that the power connection between the boards on two-pen models is made at the
factory. On CE Mark and UL models the connection between the terminal block at the bottom
of the case and the PCA is also made at the factory. In all models, you only have to
connect power to a single terminal block.
3
4
Strip 1/4-inch maximum of insulation from the end of each wire and form end to fit under a
screw connection.
ATTENTION: To avoid damaging the recorder, be sure that you install the power wires into the
Tighten the screws to secure the wires.
5
6
Dress the wires with as much slack as possible. Do not bundle any low level signal wires with
Refer to Appendix A for additional information concerning noise interference prevention.
WARNING
SHOCK HAZARD
Input line voltage may be present on the instrument ground plane if earth ground is not
attached.
Failure to observe this precaution can result in serious personal injury.
28
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
12/03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installation
Main PCA
Pen 2
Main PCA
Pen 1
TB2
TB2
B1
TB1
4
L
N
5
24821
TB6
2
3
It is the user’s responsibility to provide a switch and
non-time delay (North America), quick-acting, high
breaking capacity, Type F, (Europe) 1/2 A, 250 V
fuse(s) or circuit-breaker as part of the installation.
1
2
3
PROTECTIVE EARTH (Ground): Grounding of
this recorder shall be in accordance with National
and Local electrical codes.
1
NOISELESS (Clean) EARTH (Ground): To minimize
electrical noise and transients that may adversely
affect the recorder, connection of the recorder terminal
(located in the rear of the case) to a local earth
(ground), using a No. 11 (4 mm2) braided copper
conductor, is required.
L2/N L1/H
100 Vac to 240 Vac
4
For 2 Pen Recorder/Controller, connect ac power
to TB1 of Pen 2 PCA. Supply connections must be
made at TB6, if installed.
5
Wire ac power to this connector if installed.
Figure 2-9 Power Wiring – Models Without CE Mark
12/03
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder
Main PCA
Pen 2
Main PCA
Pen 1
TB2
TB2
TB1
TB1
L N
24820
Ground
Screw
L
N
3
2
It is the user’s responsibility to provide a switch and
non-time delay (North America), quick-acting, high
breaking capacity, Type F, (Europe) 1/2 A, 250 V
fuse(s) or circuit-breaker as part of the installation.
1
2
2
3
PROTECTIVE EARTH (Ground): Grounding of
this recorder shall be in accordance with National
and Local electrical codes.
1
NOISELESS (Clean) EARTH (Ground): To minimize
electrical noise and transients that may adversely
affect the recorder, connection of the recorder terminal
(located in the rear of the case) to a local earth
(ground), using a No. 11 (4 mm2) braided copper
conductor, is required.
L1/H
L2/N
100 Vac to 240 Vac
Figure 2-10 Power Wiring – Models With CE Mark
30
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
12/03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installation
2.5.2 Analog Input Wiring
Introduction
The input for pen channel 1 is wired to TB2 on the printed circuit assembly (PCA) on the right (when
facing recorder). The input for pen channel 2 is wired to TB2 on the PCA on the left.
Each input can be wired for thermocouple, RTD, mA, mV, or Volt actuations.
ATTENTION
Make sure you have configured the recorder to accept the desired input type. See Section 3 –
Configuration, Startup, and Operation of Recorder Without Display or Section 4 – Configuration,
Startup, and Operation of Recorder With Display.
Procedure
Table 2-9 Analog Input Wiring
Step
Action
ATTENTION To avoid damaging the recorder, be sure that you install the power wires into the
Turn off the power to the recorder.
1
2
3
Open the recorder door. Loosen the captive screw in the chart plate and swing the plate out.
Locate terminal block TB2 on the right edge of the printed circuit assembly for pen 1 (refer to
NOT bundle them with the power wires.
4
5
6
Strip 1/4-inch maximum of insulation from the end of each wire and form end to fit under the
screw terminal on the removable connection block.
Insert the wires under the appropriate screws for the applicable input type. See Figure 2-11 for
specific input actuation wiring.
Tighten the screws to secure the wires.
If the recorder has two pens, repeat Steps 3 through 6 to wire the input for the second pen
channel to TB2 on the PCA on the left inside of the recorder.
7
12/03
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder
Main PCA
Pen 2
Main PCA
Pen 1
7
7
TB2
TB2
TB1
TB1
+ White
J
- Red
+ Yellow
24086
K
T
Thermocouple
- Red
+ Blue
TB2
+
- Red
+ Black
Be sure that thermocouple
extension wire matches
thermocouple type
T/C
R
S
E
B
N
–
- Red
+ Black
R
- Red
+ Purple
•
•
100 ohm maximum lead resistance
Keep resistance of all wires equal
Use 18 gauge copper wire for lengths up
to 150 feet.
RTD
- Red
+ Gray
TB2
•
+
- Red
+ Orange
RTD
• For two wire RTD jumper terminal
negative (-) to R.
–
- Red
R
• Many 3-wire RTDs use color coded
wires. One wire is a different color than
the other two. The single wire is usually
the positive connection
Standard used as color
reference ANSI MC96.1
mA, mV or Volt
TB2
+
mA, mV or
Volt source
–
R
Figure 2-11 Analog Input Wiring
32
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
12/03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installation
2.5.3 Digital Inputs (Optional)
Introduction
If the recorder hardware supports optional digital inputs, the inputs are wired to the terminal block on the
digital input board mounted on stand-offs on the printed circuit assembly for the pen channel.
Procedure
Table 2-10 Digital Input Wiring
Step
Action
ATTENTION To avoid damaging the recorder, be sure that you install the power wires into the
Open the recorder door. Loosen the captive screw in the chart plate and swing the plate out.
1
2
Locate the terminal block, P3D, on the optional digital input printed circuit assembly mounted
on stand-offs above the printed circuit assembly (PCA) for the pen channel. The PCA on the
right inside the recorder is for pen 1; if there is a second pen, its PCA is on the left. (See Figure
NOT bundle them with the power wires.
3
4
5
6
Strip 1/4-inch maximum of insulation from the end of each wire and form end to fit under a
screw connection.
Insert the wires under the appropriate screws for the input number (labeled on assembly).
Tighten the screws to secure the wires.
If the recorder has two pens, repeat Steps 2 through 5 to wire the input for the second pen
channel.
12/03
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder
Main PCA
Pen 2
Main PCA
Pen 1
TB2
TB2
TB1
TB1
Digital
Input PCA
J9
24142
Digital
Input
Switch #1
Digital
Input
Switch #2
Connect shield
to ground at
one end only
P3D
Switch
Common
Figure 2-12 Digital Input Wiring
34
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
12/03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installation
2.5.4 Communication (Optional)
Introduction
If the recorder hardware supports optional Modbus RTU communication, the communication link is wired
to the terminal block on the communication board in the upper left corner of the case.
ATTENTION
Network address, baud rate, and transmitter delay are configurable for models with a display (see
Section 4).
For models without a display the address of pen 1 is fixed at 127, baud rate is fixed at 9600, and
there is no transmitter delay. Only one pen channel with the fixed address of 127 can be on the
network. Pen channel 2, if present in the recorder, cannot communicate. (Display is required to
configure a unique address for the second pen to communicate.)
Procedure
Table 2-11 Communication Wiring
Step
Action
ATTENTION To avoid damaging the recorder, be sure that you install the power wires into the
Open the recorder door. Loosen the captive screw in the chart plate and swing the plate out.
1
2
Locate the terminal block on the optional communication printed circuit assembly in the upper
3
4
5
Strip 1/4-inch maximum of insulation from the end of each wire and form end to fit under a
screw connection.
Insert the wires under the appropriate screws (labeled on assembly). Tighten the screws to
secure the wires.
12/03
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder
Communication PCA
Main PCA
Pen 1
TB2
TB2
TB1
TB1
Main PCA
Pen 2
24822
Communications master
J3
Tx+/
Rx+
Tx–/
Rx–
_
+
SHLD
120 Ohm
Resistor
See
Note
Place 120 Ohm Resistor on
last device, between Tx+/Rx+
and Tx–/Rx–.
NOTE: The shield of the
To other
communication cable is connected
to ground at the recorder end, and
should not extend into the recorder
enclosure.
communications
instruments
(Maximum 15)
Optional communication
Figure 2-13 Communication Wiring
36
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
12/03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installation
2.6 Output Wiring
ATTENTION
The recorder is available with several options and multiple output algorithms. Output terminal use
depends on which output algorithm and options are used. The wiring diagrams in this section
show how to wire the terminals. To see which terminals are used for what output function, refer to
each can use a different output algorithm. (The output algorithm is set with the control set up group
“OUTALG” parameter.)
Table 2-12 Output Terminal Use for Output Algorithm and Option Combinations
Terminal Function
OUTALG value
Current Out
(TB5)
Relay 1
(TB4)
Relay 2
(TB3)
NONE
RLY
auxilary output*
auxilary output*
auxilary output*
control
alarm 1
control
alarm 2 or timer*
alarm 2 or timer*
control 2 (cool)
alarm 2 or timer*
alarm 2 or timer*
alarm 2 or timer*
RLYD
CUR
control 1 (heat)
alarm 1
CurT
control (cool)
control (heat)
control (heat)
control (cool)
Tcur
*Option
2.6.1 Discrete Outputs
Introduction
Each pen channel in the recorder models having display and keypad can be equipped with two optional
discrete outputs. These outputs can be used for control or alarming, depending on the configuration as
described in Section 4 – Configuration, Startup, and Operation of Recorder with Display.
Three types of discrete outputs are available:
•
•
•
electromechanical relay
solid state relay
open collector output
ATTENTION
The electromechanical relays on the printed circuit assembly (PCA) for each pen channel can be wired for
Normally Open (NO) and Normally Closed (NC) operation.
ATTENTION
The DR4300 is available as a limit controller. In a limit controller each pen channel’s printed circuit
assembly Relay 1 (TB4 terminals 3 and 2 for NO contacts, and 2 and 1 for NC contacts) is used for
limit control. When the recorder detects that the input has exceeded the limit (or fallen below the
limit, depending on configuration), the controller goes to the limit state: Relay 1 is de-energized.
12/03
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder
Insulation of output wires
The insulation of wires connected to the relay output terminals shall be rated for the highest voltage
involved. Extra Low Voltage (ELV) wiring (input, current output, and low voltage control/alarm circuits)
shall be separated from HAZARDOUS LIVE (>30 Vac, 42.4 Vpeak or 60 Vdc) wiring per Table 2-6.
Procedure
Refer to Table 2-12 to see the output function of each terminal with the available output algorithms and
options.
Table 2-13 Relay Output Wiring - 1 or 2 Pen Models
Step
Action
ATTENTION To avoid damaging the recorder, be sure that you install the power wires into the
Turn off the power to the recorder.
1
2
3
Open the recorder door. Loosen the captive screw in the chart plate and swing the plate out.
Locate terminal blocks TB3* and TB4* on the bottom right edge of the printed circuit assembly
(PCA) for pen 1 or pen 2.
NOT bundle them with input wires.
4
5
6
Strip 1/4-inch maximum of insulation from the end of each wire and form end to fit under a
screw connection.
Insert the wires under the appropriate screws for the applicable relay output as shown in the
figures. Tighten the screws to secure the wires.
*TB3 is output 2.
TB4 is output 1.
38
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
12/03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installation
Main PCA
Pen 2
Main PCA
Pen 1
TB2
TB2
TB1
TB1
24823
OR
TB4
TB3
TB4
TB3
3
2
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
To terminal
1 or 3
To terminal
1 or 3
Relay #2
Load
Relay #1
Load
Relay #1
Load
Relay #2
Load
1
1
2
Load
Supply
Power
Load
Supply
Power
Load Supply
Power
Load Supply
Power
Electromechanical
Relay Output Wiring
Solid State Relay
Output Wiring
1
If the load current is less than the minimum rated value of 20 mA, there may be a residual voltage
across both ends of the load even if the relay is turned off. Use a dummy resistor as shown to
counteract this. The total current through the resistor and the load current must exceed 20 mA.
2
Solid State relays are rated at 0.5 Amps. Size fuses accordingly.
Figure 2-14 Relay Output Wiring
12/03
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder
Main PCA
Pen 2
Main PCA
Pen 1
TB2
TB2
TB1
TB1
24145A
0 to 30 Vac
0 to 30 Vac
OR
–
+
–
+
–
+
–
+
TB4
1
TB3
1
TB4
1
TB3
3
2
3
2
3
2
3
2
1
_
_
+
+
Customer Supplied
Electromechanical Relay
Customer Supplied
Solid State Relay
Figure 2-15 Open Collector Output Wiring
40
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
12/03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installation
2.6.2 Current Output
Introduction
4 to 20 mA current outputs are optionally available for each pen channel in the recorder models having
display and keypad.
Insulation of output wires
The insulation of wires connected to the relay output terminals shall be rated for the highest voltage
involved. Extra Low Voltage (ELV) wiring (input, current output, and low voltage control/alarm circuits)
shall be separated from HAZARDOUS LIVE (>30 Vac, 42.4 Vpeak or 60 Vdc) wiring per Table 2-6.
Procedure
Refer to Table 2-12 to see the output function of TB5 with the available output algorithms and options.
Table 2-14 Current Output Wiring
Step
Action
ATTENTION To avoid damaging the recorder, be sure that you install the power wires into the
Turn off the power to the recorder.
1
2
3
Open the recorder door. Loosen the captive screw in the chart plate and swing the plate out.
Locate terminal block TB5 on the printed circuit assembly (PCA) for pen 1 or pen 2. (See
Refer to Table 2-6 for acceptable wire bundling.
4
5
6
Strip 1/4-inch maximum of insulation from the end of each wire and form end to fit under a
screw connection.
Insert the wires under the appropriate screws for the applicable relay output as shown in the
figure. Tighten the screws to secure the wires.
12/03
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installation
2.6.3 Transmitter Power Out
Introduction
A recorder model is available that provides +24 Vdc power out to a transmitter.
Procedure
Table 2-15 Transmitter Power Out Wiring
Step
Action
ATTENTION To avoid damaging the recorder, be sure that you install the power wires into the
Turn off the power to the recorder.
1
2
3
Open the recorder door. Loosen the captive screw in the chart plate and swing the plate out.
Locate the DC OUT terminal block on the Transmitter Power Module, located above the
printed circuit assembly (PCA) for pen 1. (See Figure 2-17.)
Refer to Table 2-6 for acceptable wire bundling.
4
5
6
Strip 1/4-inch maximum of insulation from the end of each wire and form end to fit under a
screw connection.
Insert the wires under the appropriate screws for the transmitter power out as shown in the
figure. Tighten the screws to secure the wires.
12/03
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder
Main PCA
Pen 2
Main PCA
Pen 1
Transmitter Power Module
24 V Output
-V
50 mA maximum
+V
TB2
TB2
TB1
TB1
Pen #1
TB2
24 Vdc*
–
+
XMTR
+
–
R
Pen #2
TB2
24 Vdc*
+
–
XMTR
+
* See transmitter's instruction manual for
power supply/receiver wiring details.
–
R
Figure 2-17 Transmitter Power Out Wiring
NOTE: Ensure switches on SW6 are set to their correct positions prior to applying power
to transmitter supply.
For switch settings see Table 3-2 (recorders without display) or Table 4-3 (recorders with display).
44
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
12/03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration, Startup, and Operation
of Recorder without Display
3. Configuration, Startup, and Operation of
Basic Recorder without Display
3.1 Overview
Introduction
Set up the functionality of the models that do not have a display and keypad using configuration and input
switches. Each pen channel in the recorder has an associated printed circuit assembly (PCA) shown in
Figure 3-1. The configuration switches are the SW1 switchbank. The input switches are the SW6
switchbank. If your recorder is equipped with two pens, the printed circuit assemblies for the two pens can
be set up differently. The PCA for pen 1 (purple) is on the right (when facing the recorder); the PCA for
pen 2 (red) is on the left (if present).
Set up is fast and easy. This section includes a table that shows the various available combinations of
recording selections (such as chart range, length of time for single rotation of chart, whether the input is
linear or non-linear), input actuation types, and whether jumper R56 should be in or out. Find your desired
configuration for the pen 1 channel on the table, then set the SW1 and SW6 switches as indicated. Repeat
the process for the pen 2 channel, if available on your recorder, and set up is complete.
What’s in this section?
The following is a list of topics covered in this section.
Topic
See Page
3.1 Overview
3.2 Configuration (Recording Set Up)
3.3 Startup and Operation
!
WARNING—SHOCK HAZARD
SET THE SWITCHES DESCRIBED IN THIS SECTION WITH THE UNIT
POWER DISCONNECTED. DO NOT TOUCH POWER CONNECTIONS
AT TB1. FAILURE TO OBSERVE THIS PRECAUTION CAN RESULT IN
EXPOSURE TO A POTENTIALLY LETHAL SHOCK HAZARD. MORE THAN
ONE SWITCH MAY BE REQUIRED TO DE-ENERGIZE UNIT.
12/03
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder
3.2 Configuration (Recording Set Up)
3.2.1 Setting Configuration and Input Switches
Introduction
Configuration switches SW1 (see Figure 3-1) and input switches SW6 are provided on each printed circuit
assembly associated with a pen channel. If your recorder is equipped with two pens, the printed circuit
assemblies for the two pens can be set up differently.
Table 3-2 shows the various available combinations of recording selections (such as chart range, length of
time for single rotation of chart, whether input is linear or non-linear), input actuation types, and whether
jumper R56 should be in or out.
Figure 3-2 shows a sample chart for a 1-pen recorder.
Procedure
Follow the procedure in Table 3-1 to set up your recorder model without display. (To set up a model with a
display see Section 4 – Configuration, Startup, and Operation of Recorder with Display.)
The procedure described here assumes that the chart door is opened, the chart plate is swung out, and the
power is removed.
WARNING
SHOCK HAZARD
When the unit is powered a potentially lethal shock hazard exists at the AC line connections at TB1 on
each printed circuit assembly. Make sure the unit power is disconnected before starting the procedure.
More than one switch may be required to de-energize the recorder.
Failure to observe this precaution can result in exposure to a potentially lethal shock hazard.
Table 3-1 Procedure for Configuring Model without Display
Step
Action
Turn off the power to the recorder.
1
2
Go to Table 3-2 and find the desired combination of recording selections and input type for the
pen 1 channel.
Set the switches in SW1 and SW6 on the pen 1 printed circuit assembly (the PCA on the right
3
Repeat for pen 2 channel (if available).
4
5
For each PCA, make a note of the number assigned to the configuration (from first column of
Table 3-2). If you have to call Honeywell Technical Assistance for help, tell the support staff the
configuration number(s) of the pen channel(s) in your recorder to speed up the troubleshooting
process.
ATTENTION
If you set the switches in an ON/OFF combination that does not match any of the configurations in
Table 3-2, the recorder will use configuration #1.
46
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
12/03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration, Startup, and Operation
of Recorder without Display
Pen #2 Connector
Pen #1 Connector
Battery
Connector
Communications
Board Connector
Chart Motor
P3
P1
P2
J3
J4
J1
Keyboard/Display
Connector
Jumper
SW1
Configuration
Switches
R56
LOWER RAISE
SW2
S2 = Reset
S3 = Lower
S4 = Raise
Input Switches
TB2
N
L
SETUP
SW5
RUN
AC Power
Input Connector
TB1
Run/Setup
Switch
SW6
24194
Figure 3-1 Location of Configuration and Input Switches
12/03
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder
Configuration and Input switch settings for sample chart
Input Switch S6
Configuration Switch S1
1
2
3 4
5
6
1
2
3 4
5
6
7
8
off
off off on
X
off
X = Don't care
on off
on on
off
off off off
0 TO 150 C J /T/C
Y
24082
Summary of Input Set Up Switch S6 Functions
1
2
3
4
5
6
200 mV
Burnout
RTD
Volts
mV
mA
Figure 3-2 Sample Chart for Single Pen Recorder
48
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
12/03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration, Startup, and Operation
of Recorder without Display
Table 3-2 Configuration and Input Switch Settings for Models without Display
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
6
ꢀ
= off ꢁ = on
5
4
3
2
1
Any RTD marked with an asterisk is IEC Alpha = 0.00391
All other RTDs are IEC Alpha = 0.00385
INPUT SWITCHES
CONFIG SWITCHES
Input
Type
Chart Type
Con- EU Non-
CONFIG Switches
(SW1)
INPUT Switches
(SW6)
Chart Part
Number
R56
***
fig #
Lin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
in
Stored
Configuration
0
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
in
255
256
ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
out
Stored
Configuration
Any linear chart
8 Hr
291
288
292
289
297
296
290
293
294
295
301
298
302
299
307
306
out
out
out
out
out
out
out
out
out
out
out
out
out
out
out
out
0-1 Volt
0-5 Volt
ꢁ ꢁ ꢀꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢀ ꢀꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ
ꢀ ꢁ ꢀꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ
ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢁ ꢀꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢁ ꢀꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ
Any linear chart
8 Hr
Any linear chart
8 Hr
0-10
Volt
Any linear chart
8 Hr
1-5 Volt
Any linear chart
8 Hr
2-10
Volt
Any linear chart
8 Hr
0-20
mA
Any linear chart
8 Hr
4-20
mA
Any linear chart
8 Hr
0-10
mV
Any linear chart
8 Hr
0-100
mV
Any linear chart
8 Hr
0-200
mV
Any linear chart
12 Hr
0-1 Volt
0-5 Volt
Any linear chart
12 Hr
Any linear chart
12 Hr
0-10
Volt
Any linear chart
12 Hr
1-5 Volt
Any linear chart
12 Hr
2-10
Volt
Any linear chart
12 Hr
0-20
mA
12/03
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
6
5
4
3
2
1
ꢀ
= off ꢁ = on
Any RTD marked with an asterisk is IEC Alpha = 0.00391
All other RTDs are IEC Alpha = 0.00385
⌧in column for SW6 switch 2 = see Subsection 3.2.2
INPUT SWITCHES
CONFIG SWITCHES
Input
Type
Chart Type
Con- EU Non-
CONFIG Switches
(SW1)
INPUT Switches
(SW6)
Chart Part
Number
R56
***
fig #
Lin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
Any linear chart
12 Hr
300
303
304
305
4
out
out
out
out
in
4-20
mA
ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ
ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢀ ꢀꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢀ ꢀꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ
Any linear chart
12 Hr
0-10
mV
Any linear chart
12 Hr
0-100
mV
Any linear chart
12 Hr
0-200
mV
Any linear chart
24 Hr
24001660-tab
24001660-tab
0-1 Volt
0-5 Volt
Any linear chart
24 Hr
in
1**
(default setting)
Any linear chart
24 Hr
5
2
24001660-tab
24001660-tab
24001660-tab
24001660-tab
24001660-tab
24001660-tab
24001660-tab
24001660-tab
24001661-tab
24001661-tab
24001661-tab
24001661-tab
24001661-tab
in
in
in
in
in
in
in
in
in
in
in
in
in
0-10
Volt
ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢁ ꢀꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ
ꢁ ꢁ ꢀꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ
ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ
Any linear chart
24 Hr
1-5 Volt
Any linear chart
24 Hr
200
9
2-10
Volt
Any linear chart
24 Hr
0-20
mA
Any linear chart
24 Hr
3
4-20
mA
Any linear chart
24 Hr
6
0-10
mV
Any linear chart
24 Hr
7
0-100
mV
Any linear chart
24 Hr
8
0-200
mV
Any linear chart
7 Day
13
10
14
11
201
0-1 Volt
0-5 Volt
Any linear chart
7 Day
Any linear chart
7 Day
0-10
Volt
Any linear chart
7 Day
1-5 Volt
Any linear chart
7 Day
2-10
Volt
50
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
12/03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration, Startup, and Operation
of Recorder without Display
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
6
5
4
3
2
1
ꢀ
= off ꢁ = on
Any RTD marked with an asterisk is IEC Alpha = 0.00391
All other RTDs are IEC Alpha = 0.00385
⌧in column for SW6 switch 2 = see Subsection 3.2.2
INPUT SWITCHES
CONFIG SWITCHES
Input
Type
Chart Type
Con- EU Non-
CONFIG Switches
(SW1)
INPUT Switches
(SW6)
Chart Part
Number
R56
***
fig #
Lin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
Any linear chart
7 Day
18
12
24001661-tab
24001661-tab
in
in
0-20
mA
ꢀ ꢁ ꢀꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ
Any linear chart
7 Day
4-20
mA
Any linear chart
7 Day
15
24001661-tab
in
0-10
mV
ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
Any linear chart
7 Day
16
17
24001661-tab
24001661-tab
1660-135
in
in
0-100
mV
Any linear chart
7 Day
0-200
mV
ꢁ ꢀ ꢀꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
0 to 1800 °C
24 Hr
78
41
x
x
in
in
in
in
in
in
in
in
in
in
in
in
in
in
in
in
in
B t/c
E t/c
J t/c
J t/c
J t/c
J t/c
J t/c
J t/c
J t/c
J t/c
J t/c
J t/c
J t/c
J t/c
J t/c
J t/c
J t/c
0 to 250 °C
24 Hr
0 to 100 Even
24 hr
197
198
230
231
108
109
25
°F
°F
°C
°C
1660-001
1661-001
1660-001
1661-001
1660-027
1661-027
1660-070
1661-070
1660-180
0 to 100 Even
7 Day
0 to 100 Even
24 hr
0 to 100 Even
7 Day
–45 to 150 °C
24 Hr
x
x
x
x
–45 to 150 °C
7 Day
0 to 150 °C
24 Hr
0 to 150 °C
7 Day
26
0 to 150 Even
24 Hr
232
233
35
°F
°F
0 to 150 Even
7 Day
0 to 200 °F
24 Hr
x
1660-114
1660-010
1660-010
1661-004
1661-004
0 to 200 Even
24 Hr
129
132
135
138
°F
°C
°F
°C
0 to 200 Even
24 Hr
0 to 200 Even
7 Day
0 to 200 Even
7 Day
12/03
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
6
5
4
3
2
1
ꢀ
= off ꢁ = on
Any RTD marked with an asterisk is IEC Alpha = 0.00391
All other RTDs are IEC Alpha = 0.00385
⌧in column for SW6 switch 2 = see Subsection 3.2.2
INPUT SWITCHES
CONFIG SWITCHES
Input
Type
Chart Type
Con- EU Non-
CONFIG Switches
(SW1)
INPUT Switches
(SW6)
Chart Part
Number
R56
***
fig #
Lin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
0 to 250 °C
24 Hr
39
40
x
x
1660-024
1661-024
1660-008
1660-019
1661-019
1660-062
1660-002
1661-002
1660-050
1661-050
1661-050
1661-062
1660-057
1661-057
1660-037
1660-037
1660-037
1660-037
1660-012
1660-063
1660-011
1660-011
1661-005
in
in
J t/c
J t/c
J t/c
J t/c
J t/c
J t/c
J t/c
J t/c
J t/c
J t/c
J t/c
J t/c
J t/c
J t/c
J t/c
J t/c
J t/c
J t/c
J t/c
J t/c
J t/c
J t/c
J t/c
ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
0 to 250 °C
7 Day
50 to 250 Even
24 Hr
214
257
258
44
°F
in
–50 to 300 °F
24 Hr
x
x
x
x
x
out
out
in
–50 to 300 °F
7 Day
0 to 300 °C
24 Hr
0 to 300 °F
24 Hr
45
in
0 to 300 °F
7 Day
90
in
0 to 300 Even
24 Hr
143
215
216
287
46
°F
°F
°C
in
0 to 300 Even
7 Day
in
0 to 300 Even
7 Day
in
0 to 300 °C
7 Day
x
x
x
out
in
10 to 340 °C
24 Hr
10 to 340 °C
7 Day
47
in
0 to 350 Even
24 Hr
148
149
217
219
48
°C
°F
°F
°C
in
0 to 350 Even
7 Day
in
0 to 350 Even
24 Hr
in
0 to 350 Even
7 Day
in
0 to 400 °F
24 Hr
x
x
in
0 to 400 °C
24 Hr
50
in
0 to 400 Even
24 Hr
152
155
158
°F
°C
°F
in
0 to 400 Even
24 Hr
in
0 to 400 Even
7 Day
in
52
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
12/03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration, Startup, and Operation
of Recorder without Display
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
6
5
4
3
2
1
ꢀ
= off ꢁ = on
Any RTD marked with an asterisk is IEC Alpha = 0.00391
All other RTDs are IEC Alpha = 0.00385
⌧in column for SW6 switch 2 = see Subsection 3.2.2
INPUT SWITCHES
CONFIG SWITCHES
Input
Type
Chart Type
Con- EU Non-
CONFIG Switches
(SW1)
INPUT Switches
(SW6)
Chart Part
Number
R56
***
fig #
Lin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
0 to 400 Even
7 Day
161
286
54
°C
1661-005
1902-001
1660-013
1661-007
1660-003
1661-003
1660-052
1660-052
1661-008
1660-056
1661-056
1661-150
1660-030
1661-030
1660-014
1661-009
1660-137
1660-137
1660-015
1661-010
1660-004
1661-011
1661-108
in
out
in
in
in
in
in
in
in
in
in
in
in
in
in
in
in
in
in
in
in
in
in
J t/c
J t/c
J t/c
J t/c
J t/c
J t/c
J t/c
J t/c
J t/c
J t/c
J t/c
J t/c
J t/c
J t/c
J t/c
J t/c
J t/c
J t/c
J t/c
J t/c
J t/c
J t/c
J t/c
ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
0 to 400 °F
8 Hr
x
x
x
x
x
0 to 500 °F
24 Hr
0 to 500 °F
7 Day
95
0 to 600 °F
24 Hr
56
0 to 600 °F
7 Day
57
0 to 600 Even
24 Hr
166
167
234
100
101
102
103
104
59
°F
°C
°F
0 to 600 Even
24 Hr
0 to 600 Even
7 Day
50 to 650 °F
24 Hr
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
50 to 650 °F
7 Day
150 to 750 °F
7 Day
10 to 760 °C
24 Hr
10 to 760 °C
7 Day
0 to 800 °F
24 Hr
0 to 800 °F
7 Day
60
0 to 800 Even
24 Hr
169
170
63
°F
0 to 800 Even
24 Hr
°C
0 to1000 °F
24 Hr
x
x
x
x
0 to1000 °F
7 Day
64
0 to 1200 °F
24 Hr
67
0 to 1200 °F
7 Day
70
0 to 1200 Even
7 Day
178
°F
12/03
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
6
5
4
3
2
1
ꢀ
= off ꢁ = on
Any RTD marked with an asterisk is IEC Alpha = 0.00391
All other RTDs are IEC Alpha = 0.00385
⌧in column for SW6 switch 2 = see Subsection 3.2.2
INPUT SWITCHES
CONFIG SWITCHES
Input
Type
Chart Type
Con- EU Non-
CONFIG Switches
(SW1)
INPUT Switches
(SW6)
Chart Part
Number
R56
***
fig #
Lin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
0 to 1600 °F
24 Hr
72
92
x
x
1660-018
1661-018
1661-109
1660-201
1660-201
1660-232
1661-178
1660-232
1661-178
1660-086
1660-010
1660-010
1661-004
1661-004
1660-053
1660-064
1660-011
1660-011
1661-005
1661-005
in
in
in
in
in
in
in
in
in
in
in
in
in
in
in
in
in
in
in
in
in
in
in
J t/c
J t/c
J t/c
K t/c
K t/c
K t/c
K t/c
K t/c
K t/c
K t/c
K t/c
K t/c
K t/c
K t/c
K t/c
K t/c
K t/c
K t/c
K t/c
K t/c
K t/c
K t/c
K t/c
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
0 to 1600 °F
7 Day
0 to 1600 Even
7 Day
179
226
227
220
221
222
223
34
°F
°F
°C
°C
°C
°F
°F
–100 to 100 Even
24 Hr
–100 to 100 Even
24 Hr
–100 to 200 Even
24 Hr
–100 to 200 Even
7 Day
–100 to 200 Even
24 Hr
–100 to 200 Even
7 Day
0 to 200 °C
24 Hr
x
0 to 200 Even
24 Hr
130
133
136
139
49
°F
°C
°F
°C
0 to 200 Even
24 Hr
0 to 200 Even
7 Day
0 to 200 Even
7 Day
0 to 400 °F
24 Hr
x
x
0 to 400 °C
24 Hr
51
0 to 400 Even
24 Hr
153
156
159
162
55
°F
°C
°F
°C
0 to 400 Even
24 Hr
0 to 400 Even
7 Day
0 to 400 Even
7 Day
0 to 500 °F
24 Hr
x
x
x
0 to 500 °C
24 Hr
98
1660-205
1660-059
0 to 600 °C
24 Hr
58
54
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
12/03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration, Startup, and Operation
of Recorder without Display
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
6
5
4
3
2
1
ꢀ
= off ꢁ = on
Any RTD marked with an asterisk is IEC Alpha = 0.00391
All other RTDs are IEC Alpha = 0.00385
⌧in column for SW6 switch 2 = see Subsection 3.2.2
INPUT SWITCHES
CONFIG SWITCHES
Input
Type
Chart Type
Con- EU Non-
CONFIG Switches
(SW1)
INPUT Switches
(SW6)
Chart Part
Number
R56
***
fig #
Lin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
0 to 600 Even
24 Hr
168
246
247
61
°C
°F
°F
1660-052
1660-052
in
in
in
in
in
in
in
in
in
in
in
in
in
in
in
in
in
in
in
in
in
in
out
K t/c
K t/c
K t/c
K t/c
K t/c
K t/c
K t/c
K t/c
K t/c
K t/c
K t/c
K t/c
K t/c
K t/c
K t/c
K t/c
K t/c
K t/c
K t/c
K t/c
K t/c
K t/c
K t/c
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
0 to 600 Even
24 Hr
0 to 600 Even
7 Day
0 to 800 °C
24 Hr
x
1660-060
1660-137
1660-137
1660-007
1660-049
1661-049
1661-016
1660-173
1660-173
1660-006
1660-065
1661-012
0 to 800 Even
24 Hr
171
248
62
°F
0 to 800 Even
24 Hr
°C
0 to 1000 °F
24 Hr
x
x
x
x
0 to 1000 °C
24 Hr
65
0 to 1000 °C
7 Day
66
0 to 1000 °F
7 Day
96
0 to 1000 Even
24 Hr
174
175
68
°F
0 to 1000 Even
24 Hr
°C
0 to 1200 °F
24 Hr
x
x
x
0 to 1200 °C
24 Hr
69
0 to 1200 °F
7 Day
71
0 to 1200 Even
24 Hr
176
177
235
105
73
°C
°F
°C
0 to 1200 Even
7 Day
1661-108
1661-108
1661-031
1660-016
1661-013
1661-109
1660-164
0 to 1200 Even
7 Day
–18 to 1320 °C
7 Day
x
x
x
0 to 1600 °F
24 Hr
0 to 1600 °F
7 Day
74
0 to 1600 Even
7 Day
180
268
°F
1200 to 1600 °F
24 Hr
x
12/03
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
6
5
4
3
2
1
ꢀ
= off ꢁ = on
Any RTD marked with an asterisk is IEC Alpha = 0.00391
All other RTDs are IEC Alpha = 0.00385
⌧in column for SW6 switch 2 = see Subsection 3.2.2
INPUT SWITCHES
CONFIG SWITCHES
Input
Type
Chart Type
Con- EU Non-
CONFIG Switches
(SW1)
INPUT Switches
(SW6)
Chart Part
Number
R56
***
fig #
Lin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
0 to 2000 °F
24 Hr
79
80
x
x
1660-005
1661-014
1660-202
1660-009
1661-015
1660-113
1660-017
1661-109
1660-089
1660-202
1660-025
1661-025
1660-032
1661-032
in
in
in
in
in
in
in
in
in
in
in
in
in
in
in
K t/c
K t/c
K t/c
K t/c
K t/c
K t/c
R t/c
R t/c
R t/c
R t/c
R t/c
R t/c
R t/c
R t/c
ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
0 to 2000 °F
7 Day
0 to 2000 Even
24 Hr
236
81
°F
0 to 2400 °F
24 Hr
x
x
0 to 2400 °F
7 Day
82
0 to 2500 Even
24 Hr
185
75
°F
°C
°F
0 to 1600 °C
24 Hr
x
x
0 to 1600 Even
7 Day
181
106
183
83
800 to 1600 °C
24 Hr
0 to 2000 Even
24 Hr
0 to 2500 °F
24 Hr
x
x
x
x
0 to 2500 °F
7 Day
84
30 to 2900 °F
24 Hr
85
30 to 2900 °F
7 Day
86
Digital Pen
(off=90%, on
=95%)
253
Rem
SW1
Digital Pen
(off=80%, on=85%)
254
in
Rem
SW2
ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
–80 to 20 Even
7 Day
199
259
260
308
261
19
°C
°C
1661-653
in
RTD
RTD*
RTD*
RTD
(dual range chart)
–50 to 25 °C
24 Hr
x
x
1660-048
1661-048
out
out
out
out
in
–50 to 25 °C
7 Day
–25 to 25 Even
7 Day
–100 to 50 °C
24 Hr
x
x
1660-091
RTD*
RTD
–50 to 50 °C
24 Hr
56
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
12/03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration, Startup, and Operation
of Recorder without Display
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
6
5
4
3
2
1
ꢀ
= off ꢁ = on
Any RTD marked with an asterisk is IEC Alpha = 0.00391
All other RTDs are IEC Alpha = 0.00385
⌧in column for SW6 switch 2 = see Subsection 3.2.2
INPUT SWITCHES
CONFIG SWITCHES
Input
Type
Chart Type
Con- EU Non-
CONFIG Switches
(SW1)
INPUT Switches
(SW6)
Chart Part
Number
R56
***
fig #
Lin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
–50 to 50 Even
24 Hr
212
213
112
113
110
111
20
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
in
in
RTD
RTD
RTD
RTD
RTD
RTD
RTD
RTD
RTD
RTD
RTD
RTD
RTD
RTD
RTD
RTD*
RTD*
RTD
RTD
RTD
RTD
RTD
RTD
ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
–50 to 50 Even
7 Day
1661-218
1660-022
1661-197
1660-104
1661-051
1660-067
1661-067
–5 to 50 Even
24 Hr
in
–5 to 50 Even
7 Day
in
0 to 50 Even
24 Hr
in
0 to 50 Even
7 Day
in
–40 to 60 °C
24 Hr
x
x
in
–40 to 60 °C
7 Day
91
in
–30 to 70 Even
24 Hr
186
187
196
192
193
202
203
262
263
22
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
°F
°F
1660-601
(dual range chart)
in
–30 to 70 Even
7 Day
1661-601
(dual range chart)
in
0 to 70 Even
7 Day
1661-075
1660-023
1661-023
1660-023
1661-023
1660-044
1661-044
1661-080
1660-201
1660-201
in
–35 to 75 Even
24 Hr
in
–35 to 75 Even
7 Day
in
–35 to 75 Even
24 Hr
in
–35 to 75 Even
7 Day
in
–200 to 100 °F
24 Hr
x
x
x
out
out
in
–200 to 100 °F
7 Day
–100 to 100 °C
7 Day
–100 to 100 Even
24 Hr
228
229
279
114
115
°F
°C
°F
°C
°F
in
–100 to 100 Even
24 Hr
in
–100 to 100 Even
7 Day
out
in
0 to 100 Even
24 Hr
1660-001
1660-001
0 to 100 Even
24 Hr
in
12/03
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
6
5
4
3
2
1
ꢀ
= off ꢁ = on
Any RTD marked with an asterisk is IEC Alpha = 0.00391
All other RTDs are IEC Alpha = 0.00385
⌧in column for SW6 switch 2 = see Subsection 3.2.2
INPUT SWITCHES
CONFIG SWITCHES
Input
Type
Chart Type
Con- EU Non-
CONFIG Switches
(SW1)
INPUT Switches
(SW6)
Chart Part
Number
R56
***
fig #
Lin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
0 to 100 Even
7 Day
116
117
190
118
250
27
°C
°F
°C
°C
°C
1661-001
1661-001
1903-002
1660-180
in
in
RTD
RTD
RTD
RTD
RTD
RTD*
RTD*
RTD*
RTD*
RTD*
RTD
RTD
RTD
RTD
RTD
RTD
RTD
RTD
RTD
RTD*
RTD
RTD
RTD
ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
0 to 100 Even
7 Day
0 to 100 Even
12 Hr
in
0 to 150 Even
24 Hr
in
0 to 150 Even
7 Day
in
0 to 150 °C
24 Hr
x
x
x
x
x
1660-090
1660-116
1660-087
1661-087
1903-001
in
50 to 150 °C
24 Hr
28
in
–30 to 170 °F
24 Hr
264
265
89
out
out
in
–30 to 170 °F
7 Day
80 to 180 °F
12 Hr
–90 to 190 Even
24 Hr
120
121
119
29
°C
°F
°C
in
–90 to 190 Even
7 Day
in
–85 to 190 Even
24 Hr
1660-179
in
–100 to 200 °F
24 Hr
x
x
in
–100 to 200 °F
7 Day
30
in
–100 to 200 Even
24 Hr
125
127
128
245
309
122
123
33
°C
°F
°C
°F
1660-232
1660-232
1661-178
1661-178
in
–100 to 200 Even
24 Hr
in
–100 to 200 Even
7 Day
in
–100 to 200 Even
7 Day
in
–100 to 200 °C
7 Day
x
x
out
in
–40 to 200 Even
24 Hr
°C
°C
–40 to 200 Even
7 Day
in
0 to 200 °C
7 Day
in
58
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
12/03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration, Startup, and Operation
of Recorder without Display
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
6
5
4
3
2
1
ꢀ
= off ꢁ = on
Any RTD marked with an asterisk is IEC Alpha = 0.00391
All other RTDs are IEC Alpha = 0.00385
⌧in column for SW6 switch 2 = see Subsection 3.2.2
INPUT SWITCHES
CONFIG SWITCHES
Input
Type
Chart Type
Con- EU Non-
CONFIG Switches
(SW1)
INPUT Switches
(SW6)
Chart Part
Number
R56
***
fig #
Lin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
0 to 200 Even
24 Hr
131
134
137
140
191
141
142
280
281
194
195
36
°F
°C
°F
°C
°C
°C
°F
°C
°F
°C
°C
1660-010
1660-010
1661-004
1661-004
1903-003
in
in
RTD
RTD
RTD
RTD
RTD
RTD
RTD
RTD
RTD
RTD
RTD
RTD
RTD
RTD
RTD
RTD*
RTD*
RTD
RTD
RTD
RTD
RTD
RTD
ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
0 to 200 Even
24 Hr
0 to 200 Even
7 Day
in
0 to 200 Even
7 Day
in
0 to 200 Even
12 Hr
in
–90 to 210 Even
24 Hr
in
–90 to 210 Even
7 Day
in
–90 to 210 Even
7 Day
out
Out
In
–90 to 210 Even
24 Hr
–50 to 250 Even
24 Hr
–50 to 250 Even
7 Day
In
0 to 250 °F
24 Hr
x
1660-068
In
0 to 250 Even
7 Day
251
208
209
266
267
144
145
146
147
218
278
°F
°F
°F
in
50 to 250 Even
7 Day
1661-003
1660-008
in
50 to 250 Even
24 Hr
in
–75 to 260°C
24 Hr
x
x
out
out
in
–75 to 260°C
7 Day
1661-055
1660-050
1660-050
1661-050
1661-050
1660-037
1661-037
0 to 300 Even
24 Hr
°C
°F
°C
°F
°F
°F
0 to 300 Even
24 Hr
in
0 to 300 Even
7 Day
in
0 to 300 Even
7 Day
in
0 to 350 Even
24 Hr
in
0 to 350 Even
7 Day
out
12/03
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
6
5
4
3
2
1
ꢀ
= off ꢁ = on
Any RTD marked with an asterisk is IEC Alpha = 0.00391
All other RTDs are IEC Alpha = 0.00385
⌧in column for SW6 switch 2 = see Subsection 3.2.2
INPUT SWITCHES
CONFIG SWITCHES
Input
Type
Chart Type
Con- EU Non-
CONFIG Switches
(SW1)
INPUT Switches
(SW6)
Chart Part
Number
R56
***
fig #
Lin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
–125 to 375 Even
24 Hr
150
151
42
°F
°F
in
in
in
in
in
in
in
in
in
in
in
RTD
RTD
RTD*
RTD*
RTD
RTD
RTD
RTD
RTD
RTD
RTD
ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
–125 to 375 Even
7 Day
–125 to 375 °F
24 Hr
x
x
1660-020
1661-020
1660-011
1660-011
1661-005
1661-005
–125 to 375 °F
7 Day
43
0 to 400 Even
24 Hr
154
157
160
163
164
165
252
°F
°C
°F
°C
°F
°F
°F
0 to 400 Even
24 Hr
0 to 400 Even
7 Day
0 to 400 Even
7 Day
–130 to 410 Even
24 Hr
–130 to 410 Even
7 Day
730 to 780 Even
24 Hr (test)
(factory
configuration)
0 to 800 Even
24 Hr
172
173
76
°F
°F
1660-137
in
in
in
in
in
in
in
RTD
RTD
S t/c
S t/c
S t/c
S t/c
S t/c
ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
0 to 800 Even
7 Day
0 to 1600 °C
7 Day
x
1660-066
1661-109
1660-202
1660-147
1661-147
0 to 1600 Even
7 Day
182
184
87
°C
°F
0 to 2000 Even
24 Hr
0 to 3000 °F
24 Hr
x
x
0 to 3000 °F
7 Day
88
60
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
12/03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration, Startup, and Operation
of Recorder without Display
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
6
5
4
3
2
1
ꢀ
= off ꢁ = on
Any RTD marked with an asterisk is IEC Alpha = 0.00391
All other RTDs are IEC Alpha = 0.00385
⌧in column for SW6 switch 2 = see Subsection 3.2.2
INPUT SWITCHES
CONFIG SWITCHES
Input
Type
Chart Type
Con- EU Non-
CONFIG Switches
(SW1)
INPUT Switches
(SW6)
Chart Part
Number
R56
***
fig #
Lin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
0 to –400 Even
7 Day
284
285
282
283
107
269
271
210
211
243
244
188
189
204
205
206
207
21
°F
°F
°C
°C
out
out
out
in
T t/c
T t/c
T t/c
T t/c
T t/c
T t/c
T t/c
T t/c
T t/c
T t/c
T t/c
T t/c
T t/c
T t/c
T t/c
T t/c
T t/c
T t/c
T t/c
T t/c
T t/c
T t/c
T t/c
ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢀ ꢀꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢀ ꢀꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
0 to –400 Even
24 Hr
0 to –250 Even
7 Day
0 to –250 Even
24 Hr
75 to –200 °C
7 Day
x
1661-058
in
–80 to 20 Even
7 Day
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
°F
°F
1661-653
(dual range chart)
out
out
in
–18 to 37 Even
7 Day
1661-637
(dual range chart)
–50 to 50 Even
24 Hr
–50 to 50 Even
7 Day
1661-218
1660-022
1661-197
in
–5 to 50 Even
24 Hr
in
–5 to 50 Even
7 Day
in
–30 to 70 Even
24 Hr
1660-601
(dual range chart)
in
–30 to 70 Even
7 Day
1661-601
(dual range chart)
in
–35 to 75 Even
24 Hr
1660-023
1661-023
1660-023
1661-023
1661-069
1660-069
1660-201
1660-201
in
–35 to 75 Even
7 Day
in
–35 to 75 Even
24 Hr
in
–35 to 75 Even
7 Day
in
–100 to 100 °C
7 Day
x
x
in
–100 to 100 °C
24 Hr
97
in
–100 to 100 Even
24 Hr
224
225
249
237
°F
°C
°F
°F
in
–100 to 100 Even
24 Hr
in
–100 to 100 Even
7 Day
in
0 to 100 Even
24 Hr
1660-001
in
12/03
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
6
5
4
3
2
1
ꢀ
= off ꢁ = on
Any RTD marked with an asterisk is IEC Alpha = 0.00391
All other RTDs are IEC Alpha = 0.00385
⌧in column for SW6 switch 2 = see Subsection 3.2.2
INPUT SWITCHES
CONFIG SWITCHES
Input
Type
Chart Type
Con- EU Non-
CONFIG Switches
(SW1)
INPUT Switches
(SW6)
Chart Part
Number
R56
***
fig #
Lin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
0 to 100 Even
7 Day
238
239
240
93
°F
°C
°C
1661-001
1660-001
1661-001
1661-042
1660-042
in
in
T t/c
T t/c
T t/c
T t/c
T t/c
T t/c
T t/c
T t/c
T t/c
T t/c
T t/c
T t/c
T t/c
T t/c
T t/c
T t/c
T t/c
T t/c
T t/c
T t/c
T t/c
T t/c
T t/c
ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢀ ꢀꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢀ ꢀꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢁ ꢀꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢁ ꢀꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢁ ꢀꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢁ ꢀꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
0 to 100 Even
24 Hr
0 to 100 Even
7 Day
in
–250 to 150 °F
7 Day
x
x
in
–250 to 150 °F
24 Hr
94
in
–40 to 150 Even
24 Hr
272
273
23
°C
°C
1660-660
(dual range chart)
out
out
in
–40 to 150 Even
7 Day
1661-660
(dual range chart)
0 to 150 °C
24 Hr
x
x
1660-103
0 to 150 °C
7 Day
24
in
–90 to 190 Even
24 Hr
270
31
°C
out
in
–100 to 200 °C
24 Hr
x
x
–100 to 200 °C
7 Day
32
in
–100 to 200 Even
24 Hr
124
126
241
242
37
°F
°C
°F
°C
1660-232
1660-232
1661-178
1661-178
1660-034
1661-034
in
–100 to 200 Even
24 Hr
in
–100 to 200 Even
7 Day
in
–100 to 200 Even
7 Day
in
–90 to 210 °C
24 Hr
x
x
in
–90 to 210 °C
7 Day
38
in
–40 to 300 Even
24 Hr
274
275
99
°F
°F
1660-661
(dual range chart)
out
out
in
–40 to 300 Even
7 Day
1661-661
(dual range chart)
0 to 300 °C
7 Day
x
1661-079
–125 to 375 Even
24 Hr
276
277
°F
°F
out
out
–125 to 375 Even
7 Day
62
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
12/03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration, Startup, and Operation
of Recorder without Display
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
6
5
4
3
2
1
ꢀ
= off ꢁ = on
Any RTD marked with an asterisk is IEC Alpha = 0.00391
All other RTDs are IEC Alpha = 0.00385
⌧in column for SW6 switch 2 = see Subsection 3.2.2
INPUT SWITCHES
CONFIG SWITCHES
Input
Type
Chart Type
Con- EU Non-
CONFIG Switches
(SW1)
INPUT Switches
(SW6)
Chart Part
Number
R56
***
fig #
Lin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
–130 to 410 °F
24 Hr
52
53
77
x
x
x
1660-033
1661-033
1660-157
in
in
in
T t/c
T t/c
W t/c
ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ⌧ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢀ
–130 to 410 °F
7 Day
0 to 1800 °C
24 Hr
*IEC Alpha = 0.00391 {all RTDs without an asterisk: IEC Alpha = 0.00385]
**If you set the switches in an ON/OFF combination that does not match any of the given configurations, the
recorder will default to configuration #1.
12/03
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder
3.2.2 Setting SW6 Switch 2
Off for RTD actuation
For thermocouple and mV inputs, the setting of SW6 switch 2 affects the displayed input in case of
burnout or other input failure.
Burnout is always upscale on an instrument with no display. When an input fails, the pen is driven upscale.
However, if the SW6-2 setting is ON, the pen may be driven downscale momentarily until the input circuit
is driven underrange.
It is important, however, to set the switch to OFF in the case of RTD actuation.
ATTENTION
If SW6 switch 2 is ON for an RTD input, the recorder will not be able to process the input
accurately, even when the input sensor is providing a valid signal.
64
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
12/03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration, Startup, and Operation
of Recorder without Display
3.3 Startup and Operation of Recorder without Display
3.3.1 Overview
Introduction
This subsection provides procedures and reference information for operating the recorder models that do
not have a display. It assumes that the recorder has been properly mounted and wired in accordance with
the instructions in Section 2, and prepared as described earlier in this section.
!
WARNING—SHOCK HAZARD
SET THE SWITCHES DESCRIBED IN THIS SECTION WITH THE UNIT
POWER DISCONNECTED. DO NOT TOUCH POWER CONNECTIONS
AT TB1. FAILURE TO OBSERVE THIS PRECAUTION CAN RESULT IN
EXPOSURE TO A POTENTIALLY LETHAL SHOCK HAZARD. MORE THAN
ONE SWITCH MAY BE REQUIRED TO DE-ENERGIZE UNIT.
12/03
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder
3.3.2 Preparing the Recorder for Operation
Introduction
Before applying power to the recorder, complete these preparation tasks.
ATTENTION
Never move the pen arms when the unit is operating unless adjusting the pen alignment as
described in Section 7.
WARNING
SHOCK HAZARD
When the unit is powered a potentially lethal shock hazard exists at the AC line connections at TB1 on
each printed circuit assembly (behing the chart plate). Make sure the unit power is disconnected before
starting the procedure. More than one switch may be required to de-energize the recorder.
Failure to observe this precaution can result in exposure to a potentially lethal shock hazard.
Procedure
Refer to Figure 3-3 to identify the basic chart plate components and follow the procedure in Table 3-3 to
prepare the recorder for operation.
Table 3-3 Preparing the Recorder for Operation
Step
Action
Open the door.
1
2
Pull up on the pen lifter to raise the pen(s) from the chart plate and remove the protective cap
from each pen tip. Lift the locking clip on the chart hub.
Slip the new chart under the pen lifter, pen and time index, and press it into place over the
chart hub.
3
4
Turn the chart until the desired time line on the chart is aligned with the time index on the chart
plate and pen 1 before closing the locking clip on the hub. Push down on the lifter to return the
pen(s) to the chart.
CAUTION: Do not try to rotate the hub.
Time index
Pen lifter
Large chart
hub
24213
Figure 3-3 Basic Chart Plate Components
66
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
12/03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration, Startup, and Operation
of Recorder without Display
3.3.3 Running the Optional Step Test
Introduction
You can test the recorder’s mechanical operation by running a “step test”. This test is initiated by setting
switches as described in Table 3-4.
This test prints a step pattern, which is independent of any chart settings, with horizontal lines drawn by
both pens at each 10% increment on the chart (see Figure 3-4).
The test will run for one complete revolution of the chart before it returns to normal operation. The chart
revolution for the test takes approximately three minutes, regardless of configured chart speed.
WARNING
SHOCK HAZARD
When the unit is powered a potentially lethal shock hazard exists at the AC line connections at TB1 on
each printed circuit assembly (behing the chart plate). Make sure the unit power is disconnected before
starting the procedure. More than one switch may be required to de-energize the recorder.
Failure to observe this precaution can result in exposure to a potentially lethal shock hazard.
Procedure
Table 3-4 Procedure for Running the Step Test
Step
Action/Result
Graphic
Turn off the power to the recorder.
1
2
Make sure the cap is removed from the tip of each pen
and the chart is installed.
Loosen captive screw and swing out the chart plate.
3
4
Note the position of all eight switches on SW1 on the
printed circuit assembly (PCA) for each pen.
5
Being careful of the shock hazard at TB1, set
switches 1 and 2 in SW1 in the OFF position on each
pen’s PCA. All other SW1 switches should be ON
(toward the edge of the board). This is configuration
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
6
Being careful of the shock hazard at TB1, place run
switch SW5 to the setup position (toward the top of the
board) on each pen’s PCA.
Apply power to the recorder.
7
8
The recorder will begin the test. The duration of the test
is approximately 3 minutes. (When the test has been
completed the pens will move away from the test
position, but the recorder cannot return to normal
operation until the switches are returned to their
correct non-test settings.)
12/03
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder
Step
Action/Result
Graphic
At the conclusion of the test turn off the power to the
recorder.
9
10
Being careful of the shock hazard at TB1, place run
switch SW5 to the run position (toward the bottom of the
board) on each PCA.
Set configuration switches on the PCA for each pen back
to the settings noted in Step 4.
11
Secure the chart plate in the operational position.
12
13
To resume normal operation leave SW5 in the run
position and power up the recorder.
Chart step pattern
Figure 3-4 is a typical chart step pattern generated by the recorder in the step test.
24141
Figure 3-4 Typical Step Test Chart Patterns
68
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
12/03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration, Startup, and Operation
of Recorder without Display
3.3.4 Startup
Introduction
The recorder is almost ready for operation when you have:
•
•
•
mounted and wired the recorder as described in Section 2
set up the recorder as described in Subsection 3.2
prepared the recorder as described in Subsection 3.3.2
The only remaining tasks are aligning the chart time and applying power.
Procedure
Table 3-5 Startup Procedure
Step
Action
Open the door.
1
2
3
Pull up the pen lifter to raise the pen(s) from the chart plate. Open the hub locking clip.
Turn the chart until the desired time line on the chart is aligned with the time index on the chart
plate and pen 1 before closing the locking clip on the hub. Push down on the lifter to return the
pen(s) to the chart.
CAUTION: Do not try to rotate the hub.
Close the door and apply power.
4
5
The pen(s) will move into position and the recorder will start to track the input value.
Time index
Pen lifter
Large chart
hub
24212
Figure 3-5 Setting Chart Time to Time Index
12/03
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder
70
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
12/03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration, Startup, and Operation
of Recorder with Display
4. Configuration, Startup and Operation
of Recorder with Display
4.1 Overview
Introduction
This section provides instructions for configuring, starting, and operating DR4300 recorder models having
a display and keypad.
What’s in this section?
The following is a list of topics covered in this section.
Topic
See Page
4.1 Overview
4.2 Operator Interface of Recorder with Display and Keypad
4.3 Configuration (Recording and Output Set Up)
4.4 Startup of Recorder with Display and Keypad
4.5 Operation of Recorder with Display and Keypad
12/03
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder
4.2 Operator Interface on Recorder with Display and Keypad
Introduction
The DR4311, DR4312, DR4331 and DR4332 models include a display and keypad used to view real time
values, change setpoints (if the recorder hardware supports outputs), and assign application-specific values
to configuration parameters.
This subsection describes the operator interface, using the display and keypad to configure the recorder,
and procedures for starting up and operating the recorder.
Displays and indicators
The indicators and text displayed let you see what is happening to your process and how the recorder is
responding.
Figure 4-1 is a view of the operator interface. A description of the displays and indicators is included.
Upper Display - four characters
Normal operation - Displays process variable
(PV) for the selected input channel.
Indicates temperature
units of PV on display.
Configuration mode - Displays selection or
parameter value.
Data displayed
is for input
Channel 1 or 2
SET
UP
FUNC
INP
1
1
2
2
F
M
R
C
MAN
AUTO
OUT
DISP
Output relay 1 or 2
is ON, when lit.
A
L
Lower Display - six characters
Normal operation - Displays selected
operating parameter label and value.
With totalization, shows totalizer value.
Configuration mode - Displays Set Up group and
function parameters.
Indicates controller mode:
M = Manual
A = Automatic
When either of the remote switches
is set for SP2, or when NumSPs = TWO
L = Setpoint 1 (SP) active
R = Setpoint 2 (S2) active
Otherwise, neither indicator
is used.
24278
Figure 4-1 Operator Interface
72
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
12/03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration, Startup, and Operation
of Recorder with Display
Key functions
Table 4-1 shows each key on the operator interface and defines its function.
Table 4-1 Key Functions
Key
Function
• Places the recorder in the configuration set up group select mode. Sequentially displays
set up groups and allows the FUNC key to display function parameters within set up
group.
SET
UP
• Used in conjunction with the SET UP key to select the individual functions of a
selected configuration set up group.
FUNC
• Used to toggle between input channel selection for display
(2-pen recorder models only).
• Used during field calibration procedure.
• Pressing this key repeatedly cycles through the operating parameters displayed on the
lower display. (Only those parameters required by the supported features will be
included in the display cycle.) The input PV for the currently displayed channel is
always on the upper display during normal operation. With the exception of “INP”, the
label shown below will be displayed at the left of the lower display, its value to the right.
INP = Input; if the recorder does not support any optional features, then this label is
always displayed on the lower display. In this case, the other parameters listed
below are not applicable.
DISP
OT = Output
SP = Setpoint 1
S2 = Setpoint 2*
UseSPn = Setpoint Select (Only appears if Control group NumSPs = TWO)
DE = PV Deviation from Setpoint
XXXXXX = Totalizer Value
= Time Remaining on Optional Timer (Hrs:Min) or
= Elapsed Time on Optional Timer (Hrs:Min)
(Displayed only if TIMER = ENAB. If “clock hand” is not moving, the
timer is not running.)
SPRG n = Setpoint Program Select
(Displayed only if SPRAMP group SPPROG = ENAB)
RUN or HOLD = Status of currently executing setpoint program**
N nn.nn = Current Setpoint Program Segment (N) and Time Remaining (nn.nn)**
REC nn = Setpoint Program Cycles Remaining**
TuneON or TuneOF = Status of Accutune II
(Displayed only when Tuning group TUNE = ENAB. See Appendix
D for detailed instructions for using Accutune II.)
For recorder model with control:
MAN/AUTO:
MAN
AUTO
RESET
• Alternately selects:
AUTO
MAN
Controller is in Automatic mode.
Controller is in Manual mode.
RESET does not apply.
RESET:
• On Limit Controllers this key functions as RESET, used to take the recorder out of the
limit state (once the cause of the limit state has been corrected) and to cause it to
resume normal operation, monitoring the value of the input and comparing it to the
configured limit value.
12/03
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder
Key
Function
• Increases the setpoint, output, or configuration values displayed. ***
• Decreases the setpoint, output, or configuration values displayed. ***
*The second setpoint is available if one of the digital inputs is configured to use this alternate setpoint in
case an external event triggers the “remote switch”, or if Control group parameter NUMSPs = TWO.
**Displayed only when a setpoint program is being executed. REC cycles remaining will be displayed
only if the program was set to run more than 1 cycle, and if the program is not executing the last of
multiple cycles. See Appendix C for detailed instructions for executing a setpoint program.
***If the timer is enabled (TIMER = ENAB) and Timer group parameter START = KEY, then this key
can be used to start the timer. To stop the timer before its timeout period has expired, set TIMER = DIS.
Once the timer has expired, use the Increment or Decrement key to reset the timer. Relay 2, which was
energized when the timer expired, will be de-energized when the timer is reset.
4.3 Configuration (Recording and Output Set Up)
4.3.1 Overview
Introduction
The display and keypad on the DR4311, DR431, DR4331, and DR4332 models are used for setting up
recording and output options in Set Up (configuration) mode, as well as for displaying real-time values
during normal operation. (Instructions for using the user interface are in Subsection 4.2.)
When the recorder is in configuration mode, setup parameters are displayed, grouped by function.
Designate site-specific values by selecting them from a list of choices, or entering them as numeric values.
If your recorder is equipped with two pens, function parameters are configured separately for each pen, and
stored on the printed circuit assembly (PCA) associated with that pen. The PCA on the right (when facing
recorder) is for pen 1 (purple); the PCA on the left is for pen 2 (red).
If the hardware supports optional relay outputs for each pen, parameters are available for configuring
control and/or alarms using these outputs. If an optional relay is used, then it can be wired for Normally
Open and Normally Closed action.
Hardware switches must be set to match the input type, and to specify input state in case of input failure.
74
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
12/03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration, Startup, and Operation
of Recorder with Display
4.3.2 Configuration Prompts
Diagram: prompt hierarchy
Figure 4-2 is an overview of the hierarchy of set up groups and their associated function prompts. Read the
diagram from left to right. (Some prompts may not be displayed, depending on the configuration and lock
status of the recorder.)
Figure 4-2 Prompt Hierarchy
Set Up Group
Function Prompts
DECMAL
BIAS
UNITS
IN TYP
XMITTR
LD CAL
INP HI
INP LO
INPUT
FILTER
BRNOUT
PEN IN
CHT HI
CHT LO
CHTTYP
PEN
CHTSPD
HR/REV
CHART
TOTAL
(Value)
RESET
TOTAl
INP EU
RATE
TOT EU
TOT DP
SCALER
RSTABL
CUTOFF
CONTRL
SP HI
NumSPs
SP LO
OUTALG
ACTION
PBorGN
CURRNG
OUT HI
CTRALG
OUT LO
PWR UP
DBAND
DEFDSP
HYST
CONTRL*
FAILSF
FSMODE
MINRPM
FUZZY
TUNE
AT ERR
PB
or
GAIN
RATE T
CYC2TI
I MIN
or
I RPM
MANRST
TUNING
PB2
or
RATE2T
I2 MIN
or
CYC TI
GAIN 2
I2 RPM
SP RAMP
TIMER
TI MIN
FINL SP
START
SPPROG
L DISP
SPRAMP
TIMER
PERIOD
A1S1TY
A2S1TY
A1S2TY
A2S2TY
A1S1VA
A2S1VA
A1S2VA
A2S2VA
A1S1HL
A2S1HL
A1S2HL
A2S2HL
A1 HYS
A2 HYS
ALARMS
AUXOUT
COMM
4mA VA
20mA V
BAUD
AUXOUT
COMM
ADDRES
XmtDLY
DBLBYT
12/03
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder
Set Up Group
Function Prompts
REMSW1
REMSW2
TOGGLE
REM SW
BLANK
DSPLAY
LOCK
LOCK
For pen alignment—see Section 8 of manual
ALIN
For field calibration—see Section 5 of manual
For status displays—see Section 8 of manual
CAL
STATUS
76
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
12/03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration, Startup, and Operation
of Recorder with Display
4.3.3 How to Get Started
Read the configuration tips
Read Subsection 4.3.4 “Configuration Tips”. These tips will help you configure your recorder quickly and
easily.
Set the hardware switches
Refer to Subsection 4.3.5 “Switch Settings” for required hardware switch settings on the printed circuit
assembly associated with each pen. The hardware switches should be set before specifying values for
function parameters.
Install recorder
Connect the recorder to ac power as described in Section 2 so that you will be able to configure the unit
using the display.
Become familiar with the configuration procedure
function parameters within each of these groups (shown in the prompt hierarchy in Figure 4-2).
Assign application-specific values to the set up parameters
The set up groups and function parameters are listed in this section in the order of their appearance on the
display. The list includes the name of the prompt, the range of setting or selections available, the definition
of each parameter, and the factory setting. It allows you to quickly find a parameter and determine the
appropriate value or selection for your application.
Complete configuration record sheet
Subsection 4.3.21 contains a “Configuration Record Sheet”. It is good practice to record your instrument’s
configuration for future reference.
12/03
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder
4.3.4 Configuration Tips
Introduction
Table 4-2 contains tips that will help you enter the configuration data more quickly. If you can not change
configuration parameters, check the status of the “LOCK” parameter (see Subsection 4.3.19).
Table 4-2 Configuration Tips
Function
Tip
Displaying Groups
Use the SET UP key to display the set up groups. The group titles are
listed in this section in the order that they appear in the recorder.
Displaying Functions
Scrolling
Use the FUNC key to display the individual function parameters under
each group. The prompts are listed in the order of their appearance in each
group.
Holding the SET UP key in will scroll through the set up groups. However,
when any set up group is displayed, you can scroll through the set up groups
twice as fast using the ▲ or ▼ key. When in any set up group, hold the
FUNC key in to scroll through the prompts within that group.
When changing the value of a parameter, you can adjust a more significant
digit in the upper display by holding in one key [▲] or [▼], and pressing the
other [▲] or [▼] at the same time.
Changing values quickly
Exiting Set Up mode
• The adjustment will move one digit to the left.
• Press the key again and you will move one more digit to the left.
To exit Set Up mode, press the DISP key.
This returns the display to the same state it was in immediately preceding
entry into the Set Up mode.
If you are in Set Up (configuration) mode and do not press any keys for one
minute, the recorder will time out and revert to the mode and display that was
being used prior to entry into Set Up mode.
Timing out from
Set Up mode
78
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
12/03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration, Startup, and Operation
of Recorder with Display
4.3.5 Switch Settings
4.3.5.1 Introduction
Significance of hardware switches in models with display
SW6 input switches: The display and keypad are used to configure the software on each pen channel’s
printed circuit assembly (PCA). In addition, the input hardware switches 1, 3, 4, 5 and 6 in SW6 must be
set to match the input type as described in Subsection 4.3.5.2. This is required so that the recorder
hardware will provide an appropriate value to the recorder software.
SW6 burnout switch 2: This burnout switch should be set to specify whether the input used by the
recorder for the channel should be sent over range or under range if the input to the recorder fails while the
“BRNOUT” parameter value is “NONE”. Alternatively, if the “BRNOUT” parameter has a value of “UP”
or “DOWN” switch 2 should be set to match. Details are provided in Subsection 4.3.5.3.
SW1 configuration switches: In a recorder model having a display and keypad all switches in SW1 will
be ignored if the cable from the display and keypad assembly is plugged into J4 on the PCA associated
with the pen channel. (SW1 switches are used to configure recorder models that do not have a display and
keypad as described in Section 3.)
ATTENTION
If the display cable is disconnected after the software has been configured using the display and
keypad, the recorder’s behavior will depend on the settings of the SW1 switches. If all SW1
switches are in the OFF position when the cable is disconnected, the recorder will continue to use
the software configuration entered with the display and keypad. However, if all SW1 switches are
not OFF when the cable is disconnected, the recorder will use the configuration in Table 3-2 that
matches the SW1 switch settings. (If the switch setting combination does not match any
configuration in Table 3-2, the recorder will use configuration #1.)
Safety precautions
Exercise appropriate safety precautions when setting switches.
!
WARNING—SHOCK HAZARD
SET THE SWITCHES DESCRIBED IN THIS SECTION WITH THE UNIT
POWER DISCONNECTED. DO NOT TOUCH POWER CONNECTIONS
AT TB1. FAILURE TO OBSERVE THIS PRECAUTION CAN RESULT IN
EXPOSURE TO A POTENTIALLY LETHAL SHOCK HAZARD. MORE THAN
ONE SWITCH MAY BE REQUIRED TO DE-ENERGIZE UNIT.
12/03
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder
4.3.5.2 Setting SW6 Input Switches
SW6 switches 1, 3, 4, 5, 6 define input type
In a recorder model having a display and keypad the input switches at SW6 must be set to match the type
of input to be used. The location of SW6 is shown in Figure 4-3. The appropriate switch settings for the
various input types are shown in Table 4-3.
Note that the setting of switch 2 in SW6 is not related to input type. It is used, along with the “BRNOUT”
parameter in the input group, to specify the effects of an input failure as described in Subsection 4.3.5.3.
ATTENTION
The ON position for SW6 switches is toward the left side of the printed circuit assembly (when
facing recorder.)
Table 4-3 SW6 Input Switch Settings for Models
Having Display and Keypad
Input Type
SW6 Input Switch Settings
1
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
ON
off
off
off
off
2
off
3
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
ON
4
5
6
SW6 Input Switch
0 V to 1 V
off
off
off
off
off
off
ON
ON
off
off
off
ON
ON
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
ON
ON
off
off
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
off
0 V to 2 V
6
5
4
3
2
1
0 V to 5 V
0 V to 10 V
2 V to 10 V
1 V to 5 V
0 mV to 10 mV
0 mV to 100 mV
0 to 200 mV
0 mA to 20 mA
4 mA to 20 mA
all thermocouples
all RTDs
off
off
ON
ON
off
off
This switch is used to select whether the input value used by the
recorder should be driven over range or under range in case of input
failure. See Subsection 4.3.5.3.
80
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
12/03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration, Startup, and Operation
of Recorder with Display
4.3.5.3 Setting SW6 Burnout Switch
Overview
What happens to the displayed input value when the input signal to the recorder fails depends on several
factors: the input type, the setting of SW6 switch 2, and the value of the “BRNOUT” parameter in the input
set up group.
SW6 switch 2 OFF for RTD
If the input to the pen channel is from an RTD, SW6 switch 2 must always be set to OFF.
CAUTION
If SW6 switch 2 is ON for an RTD input, the recorder will not be able to process the input correctly,
even when the input sensor is providing a valid input signal.
SW6 switch 2 setting unimportant for Volt, mV, and mA inputs
It does not matter whether SW6 switch 2 is ON or OFF if the pen channel uses a Volt, mV, or mA input
signal. In case of input failure, the displayed input value will show little change, regardless of the setting of
SW6 switch 2 or the value assigned to the “BRNOUT” parameter. (However, the value of “BRNOUT” is
still important to implementing your control strategy because the value of “BRNOUT” affects the output
SW6 switch 2 setting determines displayed thermocouple input if BRNOUT = NONE
If the value of “BRNOUT” is “NONE” when a thermocouple input fails, then the setting of SW6 switch 2
determines whether the displayed input value will be under range or over range. The recorder can display
1 % over or under range for thermocouples.
•
•
If SW6 switch 2 is ON, the displayed value will be under range.
If SW6 switch 2 is OFF, the displayed value will be over range.
If the pen is configured to trace the input value (“PENIN” pen set up parameter value is “INP”), then the
pen will also be driven over or under range.
Note that the over range or under range input will have no effect on output. When “BRNOUT” =
“NONE”, the recorder uses the configured failsafe value as the output in case of input failure, rather than a
calculated value based on input.
SW6 switch 2 setting for thermocouple inputs should match BRNOUT if BRNOUT = UP OR DOWN
We recommend that, in the case of thermocouple inputs, SW6 switch 2 be set to OFF if “BRNOUT” =
“UP” and ON if “BRNOUT” = “DOWN”.
When the input failure first occurs, the displayed input for a thermocouple input will briefly be driven
according to the hardware switch setting. However, as soon as the software recognizes that it has received
an out-of-range input signal, the displayed input will be driven according to the value, “UP” or “DOWN”,
configured for “BRNOUT”. The displayed value (over range or under range) as configured in “BRNOUT”,
will remain on the display until a valid input is restored.
12/03
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder
If the switch and the set up parameter do not match, operator confusion may result. For example, in case of
mismatch the displayed value could first go under range, then quickly go over range. However, except for
the brief period before the software reacts to the out-of-range value, the effect of the mismatch is
insignificant.
Pen #2 Connector
Battery
Connector
Communications
Board Connector
Pen #1 Connector
Chart Motor
P3
P1
P2
J3
J4
J1
Keyboard/Display
Connector
SW1
Configuration
Switches
LOWER RAISE
SW2
S2 = Reset
S3 = Lower
S4 = Raise
Input Switches
Input Connector
N
L
SETUP
TB2
SW5
RUN
AC Power
TB1
Run/Setup
Switch*
SW6
*Also used as a
lockout switch
in the “SETUP”
position.
TB4
TB3
3
2
1
3
2
1
TB5
1
24084
Relay Output
Current Output/Aux. Output
Figure 4-3 Location of Switches and Relays
82
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
12/03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration, Startup, and Operation
of Recorder with Display
4.3.6 Configuration Procedure
Introduction
The configuration prompts are sequenced in a group/function hierarchy as shown in Figure 4-2. Once you
have set the input switches in SW6 as described in Subsection 4.3.5, configure all the function parameters
that are applicable for your recorder model and application. During configuration some function
parameters will not be displayed if they do not apply to your application. For example, if you set the
control group function “CONTRL” to “DIS”, disabling control, then no other control group prompts will
be displayed.
To enter your selections or values, follow the procedure in Table 4-4 and fill in the values or selections on
the worksheet in Subsection 4.3.21. Keep this worksheet as a record of how your recorder was configured.
This procedure tells you the keys to press to get to any set up group (and any associated function
parameters prompt).
Procedure
Follow the procedure listed in Table 4-4 to access the set up groups and function prompts. If you have a
2-pen recorder, be sure to identify individual parameters for each pen and control loop as applicable.
Make sure lock set up group “LOCK” function is set to “NONE” or “CAL.” See Subsection 4.3.19.
Table 4-4 Configuration Procedure
Step
1
Operation
Press
Result
Upper Display
SET
Select Set Up mode
SET
UP
Lets you know you are in the
configuration mode and a set up group
title is being displayed in the lower
display.
Lower Display
INPUT
This is the first set up group title.
Select any set up group
2
• Successive presses of the SET UP key will display
SET
UP
the other set up group titles shown in the prompt
hierarchy in Figure 4-2.
• You can also use the [▲] [▼] keys to scan the set up
groups in both directions.
• Stop at the set up group title which describes the
group of parameters you want to configure. Then
proceed to the next step.
Upper Display
Select a function parameter
3
xxxx
FUNC
Shows the current value or selection for
the first function prompt of the set up
group that you have selected.
Lower Display
DECMAL
Shows the first function prompt within
the selected set up group.
Example displays show Input group function prompt
“DECMAL” and the value selected.
12/03
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder
Step
4
Operation
Press
FUNC
Result
Select other function
parameters
• Successive presses of the FUNC key will
sequentially display the other function prompts of the
set up group you have selected.
• Stop at the function prompt that you want to change,
then proceed to the next step.
Change the value or
selection
• These keys increment or decrement the value or
selection that appears for the function prompt you
have selected.
5
or
instructions to increase or decrease value quickly.
• Change the value or selection to meet your needs.
• If the display flashes, you are trying to make an
unacceptable entry.
Enter the value or selection
• This key selects another function prompt.
6
FUNC
or
• This key selects another set up group.
SET
UP
The value or selection you have made will be entered
into memory after another key is pressed.
Exit Configuration
2-Pen Recorders
This exits configuration mode and returns the recorder
to the same state it was in immediately before you
entered configuration mode. Any changes made during
the configuration session are stored when configuration
mode is exited.
7
8
DISP
For 2-pen recorders, press FUNC key to select INP 2
FUNC
for display and return to step 1 to configure the
parameters for pen 2.
84
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
12/03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration, Startup, and Operation
of Recorder with Display
4.3.7 Input Parameters Set Up Group
Introduction
These are the parameters required to configure the temperature units, decimal location, actuation, high and
low range values in engineering units, bias, filter, and burnout. For a 2-pen recorder, the desired input
channel is displayed on the left side of the operator interface.
Press FUNC key to select channel.
Input group prompts
Table 4-5 lists all the function prompts in the input set up group.
Press SETUP key until “INPUT” appears in the lower display.
Press FUNC key to display the parameters.
Table 4-5 Input Parameter Definitions
Lower Display
Upper Display
Range of Setting
or Selection
Parameter
Definition
Prompt
DECMAL
DECIMAL POINT LOCATION—This selection determines where
the decimal point appears in the display.
None
One Place
Two Places
XXXX [factory setting]
XXX.X
XX.XX
NOTE: Be sure the selection agrees with the value to be displayed.
If PV requires 4 whole digits, the decimal will not show. Value of “IN
TYP” parameter must be for a linear input type for two decimal
places to be displayed.
UNITS
TEMPERATURE UNITS—This selection will be indicated on the PV
display.
NONE
No units
F
C
[factory setting]
Degrees Fahrenheit
Degrees Celsius
12/03
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder
Lower Display
Prompt
Upper Display
Range of Setting
or Selection
Parameter
Definition
IN TYP
INPUT ACTUATION TYPE—This selection specifies what actuation
you are going to use for the input. Be sure that the values
configured for the high and low chart range, alarm setpoint, etc. are
within the measuring range for the selected actuation type.
B thermocouple
105 to 3300°F
–454 to 1832°F
–200 to 1100°F
0 to 1600°F
41 to 1815°C
–270 to 1000°C
–129 to 593°C
–18 to 871°C
–7 to 410°C
–196 to 1371°C
–29 to 538°C
0 to 1371°C
B
EH
EL
JH
JL
KH
KL
NNM
NIC
E thermocouple high
E thermocouple low
J thermocouple high
J thermocouple low
K thermocouple high
K thermocouple low
NiNiMo thermocouple
Nicrosil-Nisil
20 to 770°F
–320 to 2500°F
–20 to 1000°F
32 to 2500°F
thermocouple
R thermocouple
S thermocouple
0 to 2372°F
0 to 3100°F
0 to 3100°F
–18.8 to 1300°C
–18 to 1704°C
–18 to 1704°C
–251 to 371°C
–129 to 316°C
–18 to 2316°C
–184 to 482°C
–90 to 200°C
–150 to 250°C
R
S
TH
TL
T thermocouple high
T thermocouple low
W thermocouple
100 Ohm–RTD (high) –300 to 900°F
100 Ohm-RTD (low) –130 to 392°F
100 Ohm-RTD (special) –238 to 482°F
4 to 20 Milliamps
0 to 20 Milliamps
0 to 10 Millivolts
0 to 100 Millivolts
0 to 200 Millivolts
0 to 1 Volt
–420 to 700°F
–200 to 600°F
0 to 4200°F
W
100 H*[factory setting]
100 L*
100 T**
4-20***
0-20***
10m***
100m***
200m***
0-1***
0-2***
1-5***
0-5***
0-10***
2-10***
* IEC Alpha =
0.00385
**IEC Alpha =
0.00391
***These input
0 to 2 Volts
1 to 5 Volts
0 to 5 Volts
0 to 10 Volts
selections are not
available on Limit
Control units.
2 to 10 Volts
XMITTR
Transmitter Input Type—Use this parameter to specify whether
the input should be used as the PV without characterization (linear)
or the square root of the input should be used as the PV.
Linear—No characterization applied to input.
Lin [factory setting]
Square Root—PV is the square root of input. For example:
suppose the linear input range is 0 to 5000 and the input type is 0 to
5 volts. Then if input = 2.5 V = 50 %,
Srt
.50 =.7071= 70.71%
.7071 x 5000 = 3535 = PV
86
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
12/03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration, Startup, and Operation
of Recorder with Display
Lower Display
Prompt
Upper Display
Range of Setting
or Selection
Parameter
Definition
LD CAL
LOAD CALIBRATION VALUES—This parameter is used to specify
which set of calibration values you want to use.
Factory—Uses built-in calibration values (stored in read-only
memory).
FAC [factory setting]
Field—Uses calibration values stored as a result of the field
calibration procedure described in Section 5.
FLD
ATTENTION
Until field calibration has been done,
FLD uses the same calibration values as FAC. When field
calibration is performed, the value of LD CAL is automatically set to
FLD at the completion of the field calibration operation.
–999 to 9999
INP HI
INPUT HIGH RANGE VALUE in engineering units is displayed but
can only be configured for linear input type.
[factory setting = 900]
Otherwise, this is a read-only display of the higher range value for
the selected T/C or RTD input type.
• Scale the input signal to the display value you want for 100 %.
• EXAMPLE:
Actuation (Input) = 4 to 20 mA
Process Variable = Flow
Range of Flow = 0 to 250 Gal/Min
High Range display value = 250
Then 20 mA = 250 Gal/Min
–999 to 9999
INP LO
INPUT LOW RANGE VALUE in engineering units is displayed but
in Engineering Units
can only be configured for linear input type.
• Otherwise, this is a read-only display of the low range value for
the selected T/C or RTD input type.
[factory setting =
−300]
• Scale the input signal to the display value you want for 0 %. See
example in “INPHI”.
–99.9 to 999.9
BIAS
INPUT BIAS—Used to compensate the input for drift of an input
value due to deterioration of a sensor, or some other cause; select
the value you want on the input.
[factory setting = 0]
0 to 120 seconds
No filter = 0
FILTER
FILTER FOR INPUT—A software digital filter is provided for the
input to smooth the input signal. You can configure the first order
lag time constant from 1 to 120 seconds. If you do not want filtering,
enter 0.
[factory setting = 0]
12/03
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder
Lower Display
Prompt
Upper Display
Range of Setting
or Selection
Parameter
Definition
BRNOUT
BURNOUT PROTECTION (INPUT FAILURE) provides most input
types with upscale or downscale protection if the input fails. Note
that if the input fails, error message “INP FL” will be on the lower
display.
ATTENTION
Refer to Subsection 4.5 for information about the
interaction of the value of this parameter and the setting of switch 2
on SW6.
NONE [factory setting] NO BURNOUT—Failsafe output applied for failed input.
UP
UPSCALE BURNOUT will make the indicated PV signal go to
overrange value when input fails. Control algorithm will use
overrange value when calculating output.
DOWN
DOWNSCALE BURNOUT will make the indicated PV signal go to
underrange value when input fails. Control algorithm will use
underrange value when calculating output.
NOTE: For recorders with the FM Limit Approved Option the INPUT configuration does not provide a
burnout selection. However, if a HI limit is configured and the input opens, the input reading will go
Upscale and the lower display will alternate between: INP#, Limit, and INP FL.
If a LO limit is configured and the input opens, the input reading will go down scale and the lower display
will alternate between: INP#, Limit, and INP FL.
88
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
12/03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration, Startup, and Operation
of Recorder with Display
4.3.8 Pen Parameters Set Up Group
Introduction
The functions in this group are used to configure the pen(s). The procedure for configuring each pen is the
same. For a 2-pen recorder, the desired input channel is displayed on the left side of the operator interface.
Press FUNC key to select channel.
Pen group prompts
Table 4-6 lists all the function prompts in the pen set up group.
Press the SET UP key until “PEN” appears in the lower display.
Press FUNC key to display parameters.
Table 4-6 Pen Parameter Definitions
Lower Display
Prompt
Upper Display
Range of Setting
or Selection
Parameter
Definition
PEN IN
PEN INPUT—What do you want the pen to record?
INPUT—Records the input for given channel.
INP [factory setting]
REM1
REMOTE SWITCH 1 EVENT—Records the digital input
event for given channel. (Event toggles pen between
90 % and 95 % on chart.)
REM2
REMOTE SWITCH 2 EVENT—Records the digital input
event for given channel. (Event toggles pen between
80 % and 85 % on chart.)
OUT*
SP*
OUTPUT—Records the output for the channel.
SETPOINT—Records setpoint for given channel.
*Only selectable if hardware supports outputs and
function prompt “CONTRL” in Control group is set to
“ENAB” (enabled).
–999 to 9999
CHT HI
CHART HIGH RANGE VALUE—Enter a value that
corresponds with the chart high range value for
the pen. (This is the value that prints at the outer edge of
the chart. If you had a range of 0 °C to –400 °C, –400
would be the chart high range value.)
[factory setting = 780]
–999 to 9999
CHT LO
CHART RANGE LOW VALUE—Enter a value that
corresponds with the chart low range value for the
pen.
[factory setting = 730]
12/03
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder
4.3.9 Chart Parameters Set Up Group
Introduction
The functions in this group are used to specify proper chart function. For a 2-pen recorder the desired input
channel is displayed on the left side of the operator interface.
Press FUNC key to select channel.
Chart group prompts
Table 4-7 lists all the function prompts in the chart parameters set up group.
Press SET UP key until “CHART” appears in the lower display.
Press FUNC key to display parameters.
Table 4-7 Chart Parameter Definitions
Lower Display
Prompt
Upper Display
Range of Setting
or Selection
Parameter
Definition
CHTSPD
CHART SPEED—This is the time it will take to drive the
chart one complete revolution.
ATTENTION
This prompt only appears for pen 1
configuration of a two-pen recorder.
8HR
8 hour revolution
12HR
12 hour revolution
24HR [factory setting]
24 hour revolution
7DAYS
– HR
7 day revolution
– hour revolution—specify Hours per Revolution selection
at prompt “HR/REV”.
1 to 744 Hours
HR/REV
CHTTYP
HOURS PER REVOLUTION—Set the desired chart
speed. Appears only if – HR was selected at prompt
“CHTSPD”.
CHART TYPE—Selection is based on the type of chart.
LIN [factory setting]
NLIN
Linear (even) or
Non-Linear (i.e., J T/C or RTD)
ATTENTION
LIN chart type is automatically selected
when input type is linear (as defined by value of input set
up parameter “INTYP”).
90
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
12/03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration, Startup, and Operation
of Recorder with Display
4.3.10 Totalizer Parameters Set Up Group
Introduction
If the recorder hardware supports totalizer functions, the functions in this group are used to calculate and
display the total flow volume as measured by the input. The displayed value is six digits with a
configurable scale factor.
The totalized value can be in engineering units different from the input, by setting INP EU (engineering
units of input) and TOT EU (engineering units of totalized value).
The total can be displayed with one or two decimal places to provide more resolution for selections that
produce smal values (e.g., Acre-Feet). A Scaler configuration other than one will override the decimal
display.
Control group prompts
Table 4-8 lists all the function prompts in the totalizer function group.
For a 2-pen recorder, the desired input channel is displayed on the left side of the operator interface. Press
FUNC to select channel.
Press SETUP key until “TOTAL” appears in the lower display.
Press FUNC key to select the parameters.
Table 4-8 Totalizer Function Definitions
Lower Display
Prompt
Upper Display
Range of Setting
or Selection
Parameter
Definition
(current scale factor)
Example: E1
(actual current
totalized value)
VIEW CURRENT TOTALIZED VALUE—This selection lets
you view the current totalized value.
In the example shown, E1 represents the exponential value
that applies to the total (total times 101).
See “SCALER” function prompt in this group for choices.
YES
RESET
RESET TOTALIZER TO ZERO—This parameter is used to
reset the totalizer to zero.
NO [factory setting]
Selecting YES will reset the totalizer to zero. When the reset
action has been performed, the parameter will be set to NO
automatically.
ATTENTION
In order for this prompt to appear, the
“RSTABL” function (described later in this table) must be set
to “KEY”.
ENAB
TOTAL
TOTALIZATION FOR INPUT—This parameter is used to
enable or disable the totalizer function. This prompt appears
first if “DIS” is the current choice.
DIS [factory setting]
ENABLE allows configuration of the rest of the prompts
associated with totalization.
12/03
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder
Lower Display
Prompt
Upper Display
Range of Setting
or Selection
Parameter
Definition
INP EU
ENGINEERING UNITS OF INPUT SIGNAL
NONE [factory setting]
NONE—Disables EU conversions and disables TOT EU and
TOT DP functions.
Cubic Feet
Gallons
CuFt
GAL
CuMt
LITR
AcFt
Cubic Meters
Liters
Acre-Feet
HMTR
Hectare-Meters
RATE
RATE OF INTEGRATION—This parameter is used to select
the desired rate of integration.
SEC [factory setting]
MIN
SECOND—EU (Engineering Units) per second
MINUTE—EU per minute
HOUR
DAY
MDAY
HOUR—EU per hour
DAY—EU per DAY
MDAY—Millions of units per day
TOT EU
ENGINEERING UNITS OF TOTALIZED VALUE
NONE [factory setting]
CuFt
GAL
NONE—Disables EU conversions.
Cubic Feet
Gallons
CuMt
LITR
AcFt
Cubic Meters
Liters
Acre-Feet
HMTR
Hectare-Meters
8888 [factory setting]
888.8
88.88
TOT DP
TOTALIZED VALUE DECIMAL PLACES—This parameter is
used to select the number of decimal places of the displayed
TOTAL value. This selection will be overridden if the SCALER
selection is not equal to 1.
SCALER
TOTALIZER SCALE FACTOR—The totalizer displays the
current totalized flow value (up to six digits maximum). The
scaling factor selected here is applied to the totalized value
when it is displayed.
1 (displays as E0)
[factory setting]
10 (displays as E1)
100 (displays as E2)
1000 (displays as E3)
1E4 (displays as E4)
1E5 (displays as E5)
1E6 (displays as E6)
1E7 (displays as E7)
1E8 (displays as E8)
1E4 equals 1 times 10 4 (10,000)
1E5 equals 1 times 10 5 (100,000)
1E6 equals 1 times 10 6 (1,000,000)
1E7 equals 1 times 10 7 (10,000,000)
1E8 equals 1 times 10 8 (100,000,000)
92
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
12/03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration, Startup, and Operation
of Recorder with Display
Lower Display
Prompt
Upper Display
Range of Setting
or Selection
Parameter
Definition
RSTABL
TOTALIZER RESETABLE—This parameter is used to specify
whether and how the totalizer value can be reset.
NO [factory setting]
NO—Totalizer value cannot be reset.
KEY
KEY—Totalizer can be reset from the keypad by setting the
“RESET” parameter to “YES”.
REM1*
REM2*
REM1—Totalizer will be reset when remote (external) switch
(digital input 1) goes to ON (contact closure). This totalizer
reset is independent of any set up of “REMSW1” in the remote
switch set up group.
REM2—Totalizer will be reset when remote (external) switch
(digital input 2) goes to ON (contact closure). This totalizer
reset is independent of any set up of “REMSW2” in the remote
switch set up group.
0 % to 100 %
CUTOFF
LOW CUTOFF VALUE—Input % of range below which the
totalizer stops accumulating.
*Digital input card must be installed.
12/03
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder
4.3.11 Control Parameters Set Up Group
Introduction
If the recorder hardware supports outputs, the functions in this group are used to configure how the
recorder will control the process. (If configuring a limit controller, see Subsection 4.3.22 for special limit
control configuration parameters.)
Control group prompts
Table 4-9 lists all the function prompts in the control set up group. For a 2-pen recorder, the desired input
channel is displayed on the left side of the operator interface. Press FUNC to select channel. Press
SETUP key until “CONTRL” appears in the lower display. Press FUNC key to select the parameters.
Table 4-9 Control Parameter Definitions
Lower Display
Prompt
Upper Display
Range of Setting
or Selection
Parameter
Definition
ENAB
DIS
Enables control.
CONTRL
[factory setting]
Disables control. If control is disabled here, the rest of the
functions in this group will not be displayed. All alarm
group functions will be displayed.
ONE [factory setting]
NumSPs
OUTALG
NUMBER OF SETPOINTS—If this is set to TWO, then
the operator will be able to select the setpoint using the
UseSPn operating parameter prompt.
TWO
OUTPUT ALGORITHM —Use to specify the type of
output.
RLY
[factory setting]
RELAY SIMPLEX—Type of output using one SPDT
relay. Its contacts can be wired for normally open (NO) or
normally closed (NC) action.
Control group function “HYST” is affected.
The second relay is available for alarming, and alarm
group functions will be displayed for Alarm 2.
RLYD
RELAY DUPLEX—Type of output using two SPDT
relays. Its contacts can be wired for normally open (NO)
or normally closed (NC) action.
Control group function "DBAND" is affected.
No relay is available for alarming, and no alarm group
functions will be displayed.
CUR
CurT
CURRENT SIMPLEX—Type of output using one 4 mA to
20 mA signal that can be fed to a positive or negative
grounded load of 0 to 600 ohms. The current output
signal can be recalibrated as described in Section 5 to
use any range within 4 mA to 20 mA to represent 0 to 100
% output.
CURRENT/TIME DUPLEX (Relay = Heat)—Variation of
duplex with current active for 0 % to 50 % output (tuning
set 2) and relay active 50 % to 100 % output (tuning set
1).
Control group functions “CURRNG” and "DBAND" are
affected.
94
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
12/03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration, Startup, and Operation
of Recorder with Display
Lower Display
Prompt
Upper Display
Range of Setting
or Selection
Parameter
Definition
Tcur
OUTALG
(continued)
TIME/CURRENT DUPLEX (Relay = Cool)—Similar to
CurT, except that current is active for 50 % to 100 %
(tuning set 1) and relay is active for 0 % to 50 % (tuning
set 2).
Control group functions “CURRNG” and "DBAND" are
affected.
CURRNG
CURRENT RANGE—This parameter appears if
“OUTALG” is set to “CurT” or “Tcur”.
FULL [factory setting]
FULL—Current output is calculated over the full range
0 % to 100 %. For example, a control output of 50 %
would result in a 12 mA current output.
HALF
HALF—Current output is calculated over half the range
(50 % to 100 %). For example, a control output of 50 %
would result in a 4 mA current output.
CTRALG
CONTROL ALGORITHM—Use this to specify the type of
control appropriate for your application.
ON/OFF [factory setting]
ON/OFF is the simplest type of control. The output can be
either ON (100 %) or OFF (0 %). The process variable
(PV) is compared with the setpoint (SP) to determine the
sign of the error (ERROR = PV–SP). The ON/OFF
algorithm operates on the sign of the error.
In direct-acting control (set with parameter “ACTION”
described below), when the error is positive, the output is
100 %. When the error is negative, the output is 0 %. If
the control action is reverse, the opposite is true. An
adjustable overlap is provided between the ON and OFF
states. (See “HYST” below.)
DUPLEX ON/OFF is an extension of this algorithm that
applies when the “OUTLAG” is set for “RLYD” (relay
duplex). It allows for the operation of a second ON/OFF
output. There is a configurable deadband (see “DBAND”
below) between the operating ranges of the two inputs,
and a separately configurable overlap (“HYST”) of the ON
and OFF states of each output. With no relay action the
controller output will read 50 %.
12/03
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder
Lower Display
Prompt
Upper Display
Range of Setting
or Selection
Parameter
Definition
PID A
CTRALG
(continued)
PROPORTIONAL-INTEGRAL-DERIVATIVE—
PID A is normally used for three-mode control. Unlike
ON/OFF control, with PID A the output can be
somewhere between 100 % and 0 %. PID A applies all
three control actions (Proportional, Integral, and
Derivative) to the error. This control can be tuned using
the parameters in the tuning group.
NOTE: PID A should not be
used for proportional only
action (that is, no integral
(reset) action). Instead, use
PDMR with “RATE T” set to
0.
• Proportional (gain) regulates the controller’s output in
proportion to the size of the error (difference between
setpoint and process variable).
• Integral (reset) regulates the controller’s output in
proportion to the size of the error and time the error
has existed (duration). The amount of corrective action
depends on the value of the proportional gain.
• Derivative (rate) regulates the controller’s output in
proportion to the rate of change of the error. Again, the
amount of correction depends on the gain setting.
PDMR
PROPORTIONAL-DERIVATIVE with MANUAL
RESET—Use PDMR whenever integral action is not
needed during automatic control. The output is calculated
with no integral contribution. Then the value specified
using the tuning parameter “MANRST” (manual reset) is
added to the computed output to determine the controller
output.
Switching between manual and auto modes will not be
bumpless in PDMR.
PDMR variations: If you select PDMR you can configure
the following variations:
• PD (proportional-derivative) control, by setting
MANRST to 0.
• P (proportional only) control, by setting MANRST
(integral term) to 0 and rate (derivative term) to 0
(tuning parameter “RATE T”).
PWR UP
POWER UP CONTROLLER MODE RECALL—This
selection determines which mode the recorder will use
when it restarts after a power loss.
MAN [factory setting]
MANUAL—At power-up, the recorder will use manual
mode with the output value displayed.
AUTO
AUTOMATIC—At power-up, the recorder will return to the
automatic mode.
INP [factory setting]
DEFDSP
DEFAULT DISPLAY—This selection determines the
SP
default display (input or active setpoint) on power up.
96
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
12/03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration, Startup, and Operation
of Recorder with Display
Lower Display
Prompt
Upper Display
Range of Setting
or Selection
Parameter
Definition
–999 to 9999
SP HI
SETPOINT HIGH LIMIT*—This selection prevents the
setpoint from going above the value selected here. The
setting must be equal to or less than the upper range of
the input.
[factory setting = 100]
–999 to 9999
SP LO
SETPOINT LOW LIMIT*—This selection prevents the
setpoint from going below the value selected here. The
setting must be equal to or greater than the lower range
of the input.
[factory setting = 0]
*The setpoint will automatically adjust itself to be within the setpoint limit range. For example, if SP = 1500 and SP HI
is changed to 1200, the new setpoint will be 1200.
ACTION
CONTROL OUTPUT DIRECTION—In what direction do
you want the recorder output to go when the process
variable increases.
DIR
RE
[factory setting]
DIRECT ACTING CONTROL—The recorder's output is
ON or increasing when the difference between setpoint
and PV (PV–SP) is positive.
REVERSE ACTING CONTROL—The recorder's output is
OFF or decreasing when the difference between setpoint
and PV (PV–SP) is negative.
0 % to 100.0 % of output for
relay output
OUT HI
OUT LO
DBAND
HIGH OUTPUT LIMIT—This parameter is used to specify
the highest output to be used in Auto mode.
–5 % to 105 % for current
output
This prompt is displayed only if the “CTRALG” (control
algorithm) is set to “PIDA” or “PDMR”.
[factory setting = 100]
0 % to 100.0 % of output for
relay output
LOW OUTPUT LIMIT—This parameter is used to specify
the lowest output to be used in Auto mode.
–5 % to 105 % for current
output
This prompt is displayed only if the “CTRALG” (control
algorithm) is set to “PIDA” or “PDMR”.
[factory setting = 0]
–5.0 % to 25.0 %
[factory setting = 0]
DEADBAND— Use this parameter to specify an
adjustable gap between the operating ranges of relay 1
and relay 2 in which neither relay operates (positive
value) or both relays operate (negative value). It is the
difference between the nominal trip points of relay 1 and
relay 2.
This prompt appears only if control group function prompt
“OUTALG” is set to “RLYD”, “CurT”, or “Tcur”.
0.0 % to 5.0 % of PV span
HYST
HYSTERESIS (OUTPUT RELAY ONLY) is an adjustable
overlap of the ON/OFF states of each control relay. This
is the difference between the value of the process
variable at which the control relays energize and the
value at which they de-energize. Only applicable for
ON/OFF control.
[factory setting = 0]
12/03
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder
Lower Display
Prompt
Upper Display
Range of Setting
or Selection
Parameter
Definition
FAILSF
0 % to 100 %
[factory setting = 0]
FAILSAFE OUTPUT VALUE—Select the value you want
the output to be when power is restored after a power
down. The value used here will also be used as the
output level if the input fails when input group “BRNOUT”
parameter is set to “NONE”.
FSMODE
FAILSAFE MODE
AUTO
MAN
Failsafe Latching Disabled – When the recorder goes
into “Failsafe”, the control mode does not change. The
output assumes the failsafe value if the recorder is in auto
mode. When the cause of failsafe is removed, normal
automatic control action resumes.
Failsafe Latching Enabled – When the recorder goes
into “Failsafe”, the control mode changes to Manual. If the
recorder was in Auto mode, the output assumes the
failsafe value. When the cause of failsafe is removed, the
recorder remains in manual mode.
PBorGN
PROPORTIONAL BAND or GAIN—Use this parameter
to choose whether you want to specify the proportional
term in the PIDA or PDMR algorithms in terms of percent
proportional band or of gain. Your choice here affects
which tuning prompt, “PB” or “GAIN”, is displayed.
This parameter is displayed only if the “CTRALG” (control
algorithm) is set to “PIDA” or “PDMR”.
PB
Percent proportional band is the percent of the range of
the measured variable for which a proportional-only
controller will produce a 100 % change in its output.
GAIN [factory setting]
Gain is the ratio of output change (%) over the measured
variable change (%) that caused it.
The relationship between %PB and gain can be
expressed as: GAIN = 100
%PB
For example, setting PB = 20 % will have the same effect
on control as setting GAIN = 5. Therefore, if the change in
the PV input were 3 % of the whole range of possible
input values, then the resulting change in the output due
to proportional only control would be 15 % of the output’s
range, regardless of whether PBorGN = PB and PB = 20,
or PBorGN = GN and GAIN = 5.
Another example: Setting PB = 50 % will have the same
effect as setting GAIN = 2. In this case, if the change in
input were again 3 % of range, then the resulting output
change would be 6 %.
ATTENTION
If the setting of PBorGN is changed,
you must change the value of the associated tuning
parameter (“PB” or “GAIN”) if you want to maintain the
same control action. For example, suppose PBorGN = PB
and the value of tuning parameter “PB” = 20. If you
change PBorGN to GAIN, the value of tuning parameter
“GAIN” will now be 20 (the value formerly assigned to
“PB”). If you want the same control action you had before,
you must change the value of “GAIN” to 5.
98
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
12/03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration, Startup, and Operation
of Recorder with Display
Lower Display
Prompt
Upper Display
Range of Setting
or Selection
Parameter
Definition
RPM
MIN [factory setting]
MINRPM
MINUTES PER REPEAT or REPEATS PER MINUTE—
Use this parameter to choose whether you want to specify
the integral term (reset) in the PIDA algorithm in terms of
length (minutes per repeat) or frequency (repeats per
minute). Your choice here affects which tuning prompt, “I
MIN” or “I RPM”, is displayed.
The relationship between the two ways of thinking about
reset is demonstrated by this example:
20 repeats per minute = 0.05 minutes per repeat.
This parameter is displayed only if the “CTRALG” (control
algorithm) is set to “PIDA”.
ATTENTION
If the setting of MINRPM is changed,
you must change the value of the associated tuning
parameter (“I MIN” or “I RPM”) if you want to maintain the
same control action. For example, suppose MINRPM = I
RPM and the value of tuning parameter “I RPM” = 2. If
you change MINRPM to I MIN, the value of “I MIN” will
now be 2 (the value formerly assigned to “I RPM”). If you
want the same control action you had before, you must
change the value of “I MIN” to 0.5.
12/03
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder
4.3.12 Tuning Parameters Set Up Group
Introduction
Tuning consists of establishing the appropriate values for tuning constants so that your recorder responds
correctly to changes in process variable and setpoint. You can start with estimated values, but you will
have to watch the system to judge how to modify the values. The tuning group parameters described in this
subsection are available only if:
•
your recorder supports control
and
•
the control type specified in the control setup group using the “CTRALG” (control algorithm)
parameter is “PIDA” or “PDMR”.
Two sets of PID constants
Two sets of PID constants are provided for duplex control. When the recorder is used in a heat/cool
application, the first set (“PB” or “GAIN”, “RATE T”, and “I MIN” or “I RPM”) apply to heat control.
The second set (“PB2” or “GAIN 2”, “RATE2T”, and “I2 MIN” or “I2 RPM”) are used for cooling
control.
Accutune II
Accutune II provides foolproof, trouble-free on-demand tuning in the recorder. No knowledge of the
process is required at start-up. The operator simply enters the desired setpoint and initiates the tuning. The
recorder immediately starts controlling to the setpoint while it identifies the process, calculates the tuning
constants and enters them into the tuning set up group, and begins PID control with the correct tuning
parameters. This works with any process, including integrating type processes, and allows retuning at a
fixed setpoint. The tuning sequence will cycle the recorder’s output two full cycles between 0 % and 100
% (or low and high output limits) while allowing only a very small process variable change above and
below the setpoint during each cycle.
Detailed instructions for using Accutune are provided in Appendix D.
Fuzzy overshoot suppression
A parameter is provided to enable/disable fuzzy overshoot suppression. When enabled, fuzzy overshoot
suppression minimizes process variable overshoot following a setpoint change or a process disturbance.
This is especially useful in processes which experience load changes or where even a small overshoot
beyond the setpoint may result in damage or lost product.
The fuzzy logic observes the speed and direction of the PV signal as it approaches the setpoint and
temporarily modifies the internal controller response action as necessary to avoid an overshoot. There is
no change to the PID algorithm, and the fuzzy logic does not alter the PID tuning parameters.
100
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
12/03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration, Startup, and Operation
of Recorder with Display
Tuning group prompts
Table 4-10 lists all the parameters in the tuning set up group.
For a 2-pen recorder, the desired input channel is displayed on the left side of the operator interface. Press
FUNC to select channel.
Press SETUP key until “TUNING” appears in the lower display.
Press FUNC key to select the parameters.
ATTENTION
Appendix D contains instructions for using Accutune II for automatic tuning.
Table 4-10 Tuning Parameter Definitions
Lower Display
Prompt
Upper Display
Range of Setting
or Selection
Parameter
Definition
FUZZY
FUZZY OVERSHOOT SUPPRESSION FEATURE
DISABLE—Disables fuzzy overshoot suppression
ENABLE—The recorder will use fuzzy logic to suppress
or mimimize any overshoot that may occur as a result of
the existing tuning parameters. It does NOT change the
parameters.
DIS [factory setting]
ENAB
TUNE
ACCUTUNE II—On demand tuning algorithm
DISABLE—Disables ACCUTUNE II
DIS [factory setting]
ENAB
ENABLE—TuneOF will be displayed as a status
message. Use the Increment or Decrement key to
toggle status to TuneON. New PID parameters will be
entered automatically when tuning is complete.
no message under normal
circumstances
AT ERR
ACCUTUNE II Error Code—Displays AbRT if “TUNE”
has been aborted manually.
AbRT read only message
displayed if tuning has been
manually aborted
See Appendix D.
0.1 % to 999.9 %
or
0.1 to 999.9
PB
or
GAIN
PROPORTIONAL BAND or GAIN—Which of these
prompts is displayed depends on the selection made for
control group parameter “PBorGN” (proportional band or
gain). Both proportional band and gain are ways of
expressing the proportional component of control. See
the description of control group parameter “PBorGN” for
details concerning the two terms.
[factory setting = 1.0]
ATTENTION
If control group parameter “OUTALG”
is “RLYD” (relay duplex), “Tcur” (time/current duplex), or
“CurT” (current/time duplex), and you are using the
recorder in a heat/cool application, PB or GAIN is used
for heat control. Cooling control would use PB2 or GAIN
2 described later in this table.
12/03
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder
Lower Display
Prompt
Upper Display
Range of Setting
or Selection
Parameter
Definition
0.08 to 10.00 minutes
0.08 or less = OFF
RATE—Rate action affects the recorder’s output
whenever the deviation between setpoint and process
variable is changing. It affects it more when the deviation
is changing faster. (This is the “derivative” component of
control.)
RATE T
[factory setting = 0.0]
ATTENTION
If control group parameter “OUTALG”
is “RLYD” (relay duplex), “Tcur” (time/current duplex), or
“CurT” (current/time duplex), and you are using the
recorder in a heat/cool application, RATE T is used for
heat control. Cooling control would use RATE2T
described later in this table.
0.02 to 50.00
RESET IN MINUTES PER REPEAT or RESET IN
REPEATS PER MINUTE—Which of these prompts is
displayed depends on the selection made for control
group parameter “MINRPM”.
I MIN
or
I RPM
[factory setting = 0.02]
Reset adjusts the recorder’s output taking into
consideration both the size of the deviation (SP-PV) and
the duration of the deviation. (This is the “integral”
component of control.) The amount of corrective action
depends on the value of PB or GAIN.
The reset value specified here determines how many
times proportional action is repeated per minute
(I RPM) or the length (in minutes) of the reset action (I
MIN). For example, if I MIN = .5, it is the same as if I
RPM = 2. The result is the same; two resets are
performed in every minute.
ATTENTION
If control group parameter “OUTALG”
is “RLYD” (relay duplex), “Tcur” (time/current duplex), or
“CurT” (current/time duplex), and you are using the
recorder in a heat/cool application, I MIN or I RPM is
used for heat control. Cooling control would use I2 MIN
or I2 RPM described later in this table.
–100 to +100 (in % output)
[factory setting = 0]
MANUAL RESET—This parameter is only applicable if
control group parameter “CTRALG” is “PDMR”
(PD with manual reset). Because a proportional recorder
will not necessarily line out at setpoint, there will be a
deviation (offset) from setpoint. This reset value can be
used to eliminate the offset and lets the PV line out at
setpoint. The controller output is the computed output
plus the value of MANRST.
MANRST
102
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
12/03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration, Startup, and Operation
of Recorder with Display
Lower Display
Prompt
Upper Display
Range of Setting
or Selection
Parameter
Definition
0.1 % to 999.9 %
or
PB2
or
PB2 or GAIN 2, RATE2T, and I2 MIN or I2 RPM—
These parallel their counterparts already described.
0.1 to 999.9
GAIN 2
ATTENTION
If control group parameter “OUTALG”
[factory setting = 1.0]
is “RLYD” (relay duplex), “Tcur” (time/current duplex), or
“CurT” (current/time duplex), and you are using the
recorder in a heat/cool application, these parameters are
used for cooling control.
0.08 to 10.00 minutes
0.08 or less = OFF
RATE2T
[factory setting = 0.0]
0.02 to 50.00
I2 MIN
or
[factory setting = 0.02]
I2 RPM
The following parameters are used for time proportional control, and are available only if:
•
the control type specified in the control set up group using the “CTRALG” (control algorithm)
parameter is “PIDA” or “PDMR”
and
•
the output algorithm specified in the control set up group using the “OUTALG” parameter is
“RLY” , “RLYD”, “CurT”, or “Tcur”. In the case of “CurT” and “Tcur”, the cycle parameters apply only to
the time-proportioned output.
0 seconds to 120 seconds
CYC TI
CYCLE TIMER FOR RELAY 1—Use this to specify
length of total cycle time for time proportional control
(proportional control using relay action rather than current
output). In time proportional control the output (0 % to 100
%) signifies the portion of the cycle for which the relay is
on (“duty cycle”) to achieve the desired setpoint. For
example, with a 10-second cycle time and an output value
of 10 %, the relay would be on for 1 second and off for 9
seconds.
[factory setting = 4]
ATTENTION
If control group parameter “OUTALG” is
“RLYD” (relay duplex), and you are using the recorder in
a heat/cool application, CYC TI is used for heat control.
Cooling control would use CYC2TI.
0 seconds to 120 seconds
CYC2TI
CYCLE TIMER FOR RELAY 2—This prompt will be
displayed only if the control group parameter “OUTALG”
is set to RLYD (relay duplex).
[factory setting = 4]
ATTENTION
If you are using the recorder in a
heat/cool application, CYC2TI is used for control of
cooling.
12/03
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder
4.3.13 Setpoint Ramp/Program Set Up Group
Introduction
All models supporting control can be configured to ramp the setpoint between the current local setpoint
and a final local setpoint over a timer interval of from 1 minute to 255 minutes.
If the optional Setpoint Program feature is specified at time of purchase, then in addition to this single ramp
capability, you can also configure a ramp/soak profile containing up to twelve segments, each with its own
time interval.
Setpoint ramp/program group prompts
Table 4-11 lists all the function prompts in the setpoint ramp group. The additional prompts associated
with the optional twelve-segment Setpoint Program are described in Appendix C.
For a 2-pen recorder, the desired input channel is displayed on the left side of the operator interface. Press
FUNC to select channel.
Press SETUP key until “SPRAMP” appears in the lower display.
Press FUNC key to select the parameters.
Table 4-11 Setpoint Ramp Parameter Definitions
Lower Display
Prompt
Upper Display
Range of Setting
or Selection
Parameter
Definition
SP RAMP
SINGLE SETPOINT RAMP — Make selection to enable or
disable the setpoint ramp function. Make sure you
configure a ramp time and a final setpoint value. “SP
PROG” must be disabled.
ENAB
ENABLE SETPOINT RAMP — Allows the single setpoint
ramp prompts to be shown.
DIS [factory setting]
DISABLE SETPOINT RAMP — Disables the setpoint
ramp. Allows “SPPROG” option to be selected.
0 minutes to 255 minutes
TI MIN
SINGLE SETPOINT RAMP TIME — Enter the number of
minutes desired to reach the final setpoint or a single
setpoint ramp.
[factory setting = 0]
A ramp time of “0” implies and immediate change of
setpoint to the final setpoint.
Within SP limits
FINL SP
SETPOINT RAMP FINAL SETPOINT — Enter the value
desired for the final setpoint. The controller will operate at
the setpoint set here when ramp is ended.
[factory setting = 0]
ENAB
SP PROG
SETPOINT RAMP/SOAK PROGRAM
Available only with controllers that contain this option.
DIS [factory setting]
For reasons of convenience, the information for the
prompts when SPPROG is enabled are included in
Appendix C.
ATTENTION
“SP RAMP” must be disabled for
SPPROG to be available.
104
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
12/03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration, Startup, and Operation
of Recorder with Display
4.3.14 Timer Set Up Group
Introduction
The timer option allows you to configure a timeout period and to select the timer start by either the
keyboard (Increment or Decrement key) or Alarm 1. The optional digital input can also be configured to
the start the timer. The timer display is selectable as either “time remaining” or “elapsed time”.
Alarm 2 is activated at the end of the timeout period. When the timer is enabled, it has exclusive control of
the Alarm 2 relay; any previous Alarm 2 configuration is ignored. At timeout, the timer is ready to be
activated again by whatever action has been configured. Relay 2 will remain energized until the timer is
reset.
Timer group prompts
Table 4-12 lists all the function prompts in the timer setup group and their definitions.
Press SET UP key until “TIMER” appears in the lower display.
Press FUNC key to display parameters.
Table 4-12 Timer Parameter Definitions
Lower Display
Prompt
Upper Display
Range of Setting
or Selection
Parameter
Definition
ENAB
DIS [factory setting]
TIMER
PERIOD
START
L DISP
TIMER - Use this to enable or disable the timer option.
0:00 to 99:59
[factory setting = 0]
PERIOD - Configure the length of the timeout period (from
0 to 99 hours, 59 minutes).
KEY [factory setting]
AL1
START - Select whether the Timer starts with the keyboard
(Increment or Decrement key) or Alarm 1.
L DISP - Select whether time remaining (TREM) or
elapsed time (ET) is displayed for the timer option.r
The time is shown on the lower display in hh:mm format
along with a rotating “clock” character.
TREM [factory setting]
Time remaining: If the “clock” rotation is clockwise, elapsed
time is indicated.
ET
Elased time: If the “clock” rotation is counterclockwise,
time left is indicated.
12/03
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder
4.3.15 Alarms Set Up Group
Introduction
If the recorder hardware supports outputs, one or both relays can be used for alarming. An alarm is an
indication that an event that you have selected during configuration (process variable, for example) has
exceeded one or more alarm limits. There are two alarms available for each pen (assuming no relay is
being used for control). Each alarm has two setpoints. There are two alarm output selections, high and low.
You can configure each setpoint to alarm either high or low. Each alarm has an adjustable hysteresis of 0.0
% to 100.0 % that is configurable for that alarm's setpoint.
If the “OUTALG” function in the control group is set to “RLYD”, both relays on the printed circuit
assembly for the pen being configured are used for control, and the prompts in the alarm group will not be
displayed. If “OUTALG” is “RLY”, or if the recorder is a limit controller, then Relay 1 is used for control.
In these cases only the prompts for the second alarm (Relay 2) will be displayed.
If “TIMER” is set to “ENAB”, then Relay 2 is used by the timer and prompts for the second alarm will not
be displayed.
Alarms group prompts
Table 4-13 lists all the function prompts in the alarms set up group and their definitions.
For a 2-pen recorder, the desired input channel is displayed on the left side of the operator interface.
Press FUNC to select channel.
Press SETUP key until “ALARMS” appears in the lower display.
Press FUNC key to select the parameters.
Table 4-13 Alarm Parameter Definitions
Lower Display
Prompt
Upper Display
Range of Setting
or Selection
Parameter
Definition
A1S1TY*
ALARM 1 SETPOINT 1 TYPE—Select what you want
Setpoint 1 of Alarm 1 to represent.
NONE [factory setting]
NO ALARM
INP
DEV
INPUT PV
DEVIATION of input from setpoint
Same as A1S1TY
A1S2TY*
ALARM 1 SETPOINT 2 TYPE—Select what you want
Setpoint 2 of Alarm 1 to represent. The selections are the
same as A1S1TY.
*For Deviation Alarm to function: control must be enabled. If On/Off control is selected, only alarm #2 is available for Deviation.
–999 to 9999
A1S1VA
ALARM 1 SETPOINT 1 VALUE—This is the value at
which you want the alarm type chosen in prompt
"A1S1TY" to actuate. The appropriate value depends on
what the setpoint has been configured to represent.
[factory setting = 100]
–999 to 9999
A1S2VA
ALARM 1 SETPOINT 2 VALUE—This is the value at
which you want the alarm type chosen in prompt
"A1S2TY" to actuate. The appropriate value depends on
what the setpoint has been configured to represent.
[factory setting = 100]
106
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
12/03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration, Startup, and Operation
of Recorder with Display
Lower Display
Prompt
Upper Display
Range of Setting
or Selection
Parameter
Definition
A1S1HL
A1S2HL
A1 HYS
ALARM 1 SETPOINT 1 STATE—Select whether you
want the alarm type chosen in prompt "A1S1TY" to alarm
high or low.
HI ALARM—Relay coil is de-energized when the PV is
above the setpoint.
HI
LO
[factory setting]
[factory setting]
LO ALARM—Relay coil is de-energized when the PV is
below the setpoint.
ALARM 1 SETPOINT 2 STATE—Select whether you
want the alarm type chosen in prompt "A1S2TY" to alarm
high or low.
HI ALARM—Relay coil is de-energized when the PV is
above the setpoint.
HI
LO
LO ALARM—Relay coil is de-energized when the PV is
below the setpoint.
0.0 % to 100.0 % of input
span
ALARM 1 HYSTERESIS—This is an adjustable
hysteresis provided on alarm 1 that activates at exactly
the alarm setpoint when the alarm is OFF. When the
alarm is ON, it will not deactivate until the variable is away
from the alarm setpoint by a value equal to A1 HYS.
Configure the hysteresis as a percent of input range
span.
[factory setting = 0]
Same as A1S1TY
Same as A1S1TY
A2S1TY
A2S2TY
A2S1VA
ALARM 2 SETPOINT 1 TYPE—Select what you want
Setpoint 1 of Alarm 2 to represent. The selections are the
same as “A1S1TY”.
ALARM 2 SETPOINT 2 TYPE—Select what you want
Setpoint 2 of Alarm 2 to represent. The selections are the
same as “A1S1TY”.
–999 to 9999
ALARM 2 SETPOINT 1 VALUE—This is the value at
which you want the alarm type chosen in prompt
"A2S1TY" to actuate. The appropriate value depends on
what the setpoint has been configured to represent.
[factory setting = 100]
–999 to 9999
A2S2VA
A2S1HL
ALARM 2 SETPOINT 2 VALUE—This is the value at
which you want the alarm type chosen in prompt
"A2S2TY" to actuate. The appropriate value depends on
what the setpoint has been configured to represent.
[factory setting = 100]
ALARM 2 SETPOINT 1 STATE—Select whether you
want the alarm type chosen in prompt "A2S1TY" to alarm
high or low.
HI
HI ALARM—Relay coil is de-energized when the PV is
above the setpoint.
LO ALARM—Relay coil is de-energized when the PV is
below the setpoint.
LO [factory setting]
A2S2HL
ALARM 2 SET POINT 2 STATE—Select whether you
want the alarm type chosen in prompt "A2S2TY" to alarm
high or low.
HI [factory setting]
HI ALARM—Relay coil is de-energized when the PV is
above the setpoint.
LO ALARM—Relay coil is de-energized when the PV is
below the setpoint.
LO
12/03
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder
Lower Display
Prompt
Upper Display
Range of Setting
or Selection
Parameter
Definition
0.0 % to 100.0 % of input
span
A2 HYS
ALARM 2 HYSTERESIS—This is an adjustable
hysteresis provided on alarm 2 that activates at exactly
the alarm setpoint when the alarm is OFF. When the
alarm is ON, it will not deactivate until the variable is away
from the alarm setpoint by a value equal to A2 HYS.
Configure the hysteresis as a percent of input range
span.
[factory setting = 0]
108
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
12/03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration, Startup, and Operation
of Recorder with Display
4.3.16 Auxiliary Output Set Up Group
Introduction
The auxiliary output set up group lets you enable or disable the auxiliary output selection which provides a
milliampere output representing one of four control parameters: Input, Output, Setpoint, or Deviation. You
can also set the auxiliary output low and high scaling factors.
Auxiliary output group prompts
Table 4-14 lists all the function prompts in the auxiliary output set up group and their definitions.
For a 2-pen recorder, the desired input channel is displayed on the left side of the operator interface.
Press FUNC to select channel.
Press SETUP key until “AUX OUT” appears in the lower display.
Press FUNC key to select the parameters.
Table 4-14 Auxiliary Output Parameter Definitions
Lower Display
Prompt
Upper Display
Range of Setting
or Selection
Parameter
Definition
AUXOUT
AUXILIARY OUTPUT SELECTION provides an mA
output representing any of four control parameters. The
display for Auxiliary Output viewing will be in engineering
units for all but output. Output will be designated in
percent (%).
The Auxiliary Output is the same output as the Current
Output and is not available if the control output algorithm
= CUR, CurT, or Tcur.
Other prompts affected by these selections: “4 mA VAL”
and “20mA VAL”.
NONE [factory setting]
NO AUXILIARY OUTPUT
INP
INPUT—This represents the configured range of input.
FOR EXAMPLE:
Type “J” Thermocouple (0 °F to 1600 °F)
0 °F display = 0 % output
1600 °F display = 100 % output
OUT
SP
OUTPUT—Represents the displayed controller output in
percent (%).
SETPOINT—Represents the value of the setpoint in units
of PV.
12/03
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder
Lower Display
Prompt
Upper Display
Range of Setting
or Selection
Parameter
Definition
DEVIATION (Process Variable minus Setpoint)—
Represents –100 % to +100 % of the selected PV span in
engineering units. FOR EXAMPLE:
Type “T” Thermocouple
DE
AUXOUT
(continued)
PV range = –300 °F to +700 °F
PV span = 1000 °F
Deviation range = –1000 °F to +1000 °F
If PV = 500 °F
and SP = 650 °F
then Deviation Display = –150 °F
Auxiliary Output = 42.5 %
NOTE: A deviation of 0°F yields an auxiliary output of
50 %.
Low Scale Value within the
range of the selected variable
to represent 4 mA
4mA VA
20mA V
AUXILIARY OUTPUT LOW SCALING FACTOR—Use a
value in engineering units for all selections above except
Output.
[factory setting = 0]
Use value in percent (%) for Output. (Output can be
between –5 % and +105 %.)
High Scale Value within the
range of the selected variable
to represent 20 mA
AUXILIARY OUTPUT HIGH SCALING FACTOR—Use a
value in engineering units for all selections above except
Output.
[factory setting = 100]
Use a value in percent (%) for Output. (Output can be
between –5 % and +105 %.)
*When Deviation is selected, only one operating
parameter will be entered. This value represents the
deviation level that will produce 20 mA output. Zero
deviation will produce a center scale (12 mA) output. A
negative deviation equal in magnitude to the Auxiliary
Output High Value will provide a low end (4 mA) output.
110
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
12/03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration, Startup, and Operation
of Recorder with Display
4.3.17 Communication Set Up Group
Introductions
If the hardware supports the Modbus communication option, use the prompts in the communication set up
group to configure communication parameters.
Communication group prompts
Table 4-15 lists the function prompt in the communication set up group.
For a 2-pen recorder, the desired input channel is displayed on the left side of the operator interface. Press
FUNC to select channel.
Press SETUP key until “COMM” appears in the lower display.
Press FUNC key to select the parameter.
ATTENTION
Each pen channel must have its own unique address. However, set the same baud rate and
transmitter delay for both pens.
Table 4-15 Communication Parameter Definitions
Lower Display
Prompt
Upper Display
Range of Setting
or Selection
Parameter
Definition
DIS [factory setting]
ENAB
COMM
ADDRES
BAUD
COMMUNICATION ENABLE—Enable/disable
communication.
1 to 99
[factory setting = 0]
ADDRESS—Specify the pen channel’s address on the
network.
300
BAUD RATE—Specify the baud rate used by all devices
600
on the network.
1200
2400
4800
9600 [factory setting]
192K
NONE [factory setting]
XmtDLY
DBLBYT
TRANSMITTER DELAY—Specify the minimum delay
between the end of a received message and the start of
the response message.
10ms
20ms
30ms
40ms
50ms
DOUBLE BYTE ORDER—Determines Floating Point
Byte order in Modbus queries.
FP B
Big Endian
FP BB
FP L
Big Endian – Byte Swapped
Little Endian
FP LB
Little Endian – Byte Swapped
12/03
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder
4.3.18 Remote Switch (Digital Inputs) Set Up Group
Introduction
If the hardware supports optional digital inputs, the parameters in this group are used to specify what action
the recorder will take if these “remote switches”, triggered by some external event, are closed.
Remote switch group prompts
Table 4-16 lists all the function prompts in the remote switch set up group and their definitions.
For a 2-pen recorder, the desired input channel is displayed on the left side of the operator interface.
Press FUNC to select channel.
Press SETUP key until “REM SW” appears in the lower display.
Press FUNC key to select the parameters.
112
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
12/03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration, Startup, and Operation
of Recorder with Display
Table 4-16 Remote Switch Parameter Definitions
Lower Display
Prompt
Upper Display
Range of Setting
or Selection
Parameter
Definition
REMSW1
REMOTE SWITCH 1—Use this parameter to specify
what action the recorder should take if digital input 1 for
this channel goes to ON (switch contact closed).
NONE [factory setting]
NONE—No remote switching action.
SP2
SETPOINT2—Controller setpoint used in Auto will go to
the value of the second setpoint (operating parameter
“S2” for the channel) when the digital input goes ON.
(When it goes OFF, the recorder will resume using “SP”
for the channel.)
Use of the second setpoint with a remote switch is
independent of the number of setpoints specified with
control group parameter “NumSPs”.
MAN
MANUAL—Controller will be switched to Manual mode
when the digital input goes ON. Output will not change
until the operator changes it. (When the digital input goes
OFF, the controller will go back to Auto, using operating
parameter “SP” as the basis of computing output.)
MNFS
MANUAL WITH FAILSAFE—Controller will be switched
to Manual mode and the output will be changed to the
value of control group parameter “FAILSF” for the
channel when the digital input goes ON. (When the digital
input goes OFF, the controller will go back to Auto, using
operating parameter “SP”as the basis of computing
output.)
HOLD
RUN
HOLD—When the digital input goes ON, the recorder will
hold execution of the single setpoint ramp or the optional
setpoint program.
RUN—When the digital input goes ON, the recorder will
start execution of the single setpoint ramp or the optional
setpoint program.
TIMR
TIMER—When the digital input goes ON, the optional
timer will start.
NONE [factory setting]
SP2
MAN
MNFS
HOLD
RUN
REMSW2
REMOTE SWITCH 2—This parameter is used to specify
what action the recorder should take if digital input 2 for
this channel goes ON (switch contact closed). The
choices are the same as for REMSW1.
TIMR
12/03
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
113
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder
4.3.19 Display Parameter Set Up Group
Introduction
Using the BLANK function, the display can be set to turn off a configured number of seconds after the last
press of any key. Pressing any key while the display is blank will restore it.
When the TOGGLE function is enabled, the pen currently driving the display will switch control to the
other pen after a configured timeout period. If the other pen has its TOGGLE function enabled, it will
switch back after its configured timeout period.
Lockout group prompts
Table 4-17 lists the function prompt in the lock out set up group.
For a 2-pen recorder, the desired input channel is displayed on the left side of the operator interface. Press
FUNC to select channel.
Press SETUP key until “DSPLAY” appears in the lower display.
Press FUNC key to select the parameter.
Table 4-17 Display Parameter Definitions
Lower Display
Prompt
Upper Display
Range of Setting
or Selection
Parameter
Definition
OFF [factory setting]
2s
4s
BLANK
BLANKING FUNCTION—Use this parameter to set
timeout period after which the display goes blank. OFF
disables the function.
.
.
.
30s
OFF [factory setting]
2s
4s
TOGGLE
TOGGLE FUNCTION—Use this parameter to set the
timeout period after which control the display is passed to
the other board (pen).
.
.
.
30s
114
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
12/03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration, Startup, and Operation
of Recorder with Display
4.3.20 Lock Out Parameter Set Up Group
Introduction
This is the parameter used to lockout any unauthorized changes to the recorder’s configuration, calibration,
and pen alignment parameters. Calibration group functions are described in Section 5 – Input and Output
Calibration for Recorder with Display. Pen alignment group functions are described in Section 8 –
Troubleshooting and Pen Alignment for Recorder with Display.
Set this group last
Because this group contains functions that have to do with security and lockout, we recommend that you
configure this group last, after all the other configuration data has been entered.
Lockout group prompts
Table 4-18 lists the function prompt in the lock out set up group.
Press SETUP key until “LOCK” appears in the lower display.
Press FUNC key to select the parameter.
Table 4-18 Lockout Parameter Definitions
Lower Display
Prompt
Upper Display
Range of Setting
or Selection
Parameter
Definition
LOCK
LOCK limits access to one or more types of set up
groups. Do not configure until all configuration is
complete.
NONE
[factory setting]
NO LOCKOUT—All groups read/write.
CAL
CAL—Locks out calibration and pen alignment groups;
they will not even be displayed. All other groups are
available for read/write.
CONF
FULL
CONF—Tuning and cycle parameters are read/write. All
other configuration groups (except lock) are read only.
Calibration and pen alignment groups are not displayed.
FULL— All configuration groups (except lock) are read
only. Calibration and pen alignment groups are not
displayed.
ATTENTION
The Lock function cannot be changed when the RUN/SETUP switch is in the "SETUP" position, making it
usable as a physical lockout. Whatever lockout level is selected, it is protected as long as the switch is in
the SETUP position.
12/03
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
115
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder
4.3.21 Configuration Record Sheet
Keep a record
Enter the value or selection for each prompt on the configuration record sheet so you will have a record of
how your instrument was configured. Remember that not all function parameters apply to every recorder
and configuration.
The prompts for the optional 24-segment setpoint program option are not included on this record sheet.
See Appendix C for a special worksheet used for this feature.
116
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
12/03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration, Startup, and Operation
of Recorder with Display
RECORDER TAG NAME_________________________________________
Group
Prompt
Function
Prompt
Pen 1 Value
or Selection
Pen 2 Value
or Selection
Group
Prompt
Function
Prompt
Pen 1 Value
or Selection
Pen 2 Value
or Selection
INPUT
DECMAL
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
TUNING
(cont’d)
I MIN or I RPM
MANRST
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
UNITS
IN TYP
XMITTR
LD CAL
INP HI
PB2 or GAIN 2
RATE2T
I2 MIN or I2 RPM
CYCTI
INP LO
BIAS
CYCTI2
FILTER
BRNOUT
SPRAMP
TIMER
SPRAMP
TI MIN
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
FINLSP
SPPROG
PEN
PEN IN
CHT HI
CHT LO
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
TIMER
PERIOD
START
L DISP
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
CHART
TOTAL
CHTSPD
HR/REV
CHTTYP
__________
__________
__________
n/a
n/a
n/a
ALARMS
A1S1TY
A1S2TY
A1S1VA
A1S2VA
A1S1HL
A1S2 HL
A1 HYS
A2S1TY
A2S2TY
A2S1VA
A2S2VA
A2S1HL
A2S2HL
A2 HYS
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
[value]
RESET
TOTAL
INP EU
RATE
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
TOT EU
TOT DP
SCALER
RSTABL
CONTROL
CONTRL
NumSPs
OUTALG
CURRNG
CTRALG
PWR UP
DEFDSP
SP HI
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
AUXOUT
COMM
AUXOUT
4mA VA
20mA V
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
SP LO
COMM
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
ACTION
OUT HI
OUT LO
DBAND
HYST
ADDRES
BAUD
XmtDLY
DBLBYT
FAILSF
PBorGN
MINRPM
REM SW
REMSW1
REMSW2
__________
__________
__________
__________
DSPLAY
LOCK
BLANK
__________
__________
__________
__________
TUNING
FUZZY
__________
__________
__________
__________
_________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
TOGGLE
TUNE
LOCK
__________
__________
AT ERR
PB or GAIN
RATE T
12/03
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
117
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder
4.3.22 Limit Control Configuration
Special configuration for control and alarms
The DR4300 is available as a limit controller. Most set up groups described in Subsections 4.3.7 through
4.3.20 apply to limit control, and are configured for the limit controller the same way they are for other
recorders.
The exceptions are:
•
Control set up group contains special parameters for limit control in place of those described in
listed in Table 4-19.
•
Alarm 1 is not available.
Table 4-19 Limit Control Parameter Definitions
Lower Display
Prompt
Upper Display
Range of Setting
or Selection
Parameter
Definition
LIMIT
TYPE OF LIMIT CONTROL
HI
LO
[factory setting]
HI — Limit action occurs when PV exceeds SP.
LO — Limit action occurs when PV is less than SP.
POWRUP
POWER UP STATE
NORM
RST
NORM — Normal limit control on power up.
[factory setting]
RST — Powers up in limit state. Recorder will not begin
normal limit control until RESET key is pressed.*
–999 to 9999
SP HI
SP LO
XRSET
SETPOINT HIGH RANGE LIMIT —This parameter
prevents the local setpoint from going above the value
specified here. The setting must be equal to or less than
the upper range of the input.
[factory setting = 100]
–999 to 9999
SETPOINT LOW RANGE LIMIT—This parameter
prevents the local setpoint from going below the value
specified here. The setting must be equal to or greater
than the lower range of the input.
[factory setting = 0]
EXTERNAL RESET—Use this parameter to enable or
disable resetting the limit controller (taking it out of the
limit state) using Remote Switch 1 (digital
input 1).
DIS [factory setting]
DIS — When external reset is disabled, the limit controller
can be reset only by pressing the MAN/AUTO/RESET
key on the recorder.
ENAB
ENAB — When external reset is enabled, the limit
controller can be reset two ways: by pressing the
MAN/AUTO/RESET key on the recorder, or by turning on
digital input 1 (contact closed).
118
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
12/03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration, Startup, and Operation
of Recorder with Display
4.4 Startup of Recorder with Display and Keypad
4.4.1 Overview
Introduction
This subsection provides procedures and reference information for startup and operation of a recorder
having a display and keypad. (For information on operating a recorder that does not have a display and
keypad, see Section 3.) This subsection assumes that the recorder has been properly prepared, mounted,
and wired in accordance with the instructions in Section 2, and configured as described earlier in this
section.
Some of the procedures in this subsection are required only initially; some are required during use. Once
the recorder is up and running, operator actions are required infrequently.
!
WARNING—SHOCK HAZARD
STARTUP AND MAINTENANCE MAY REQUIRE ACCESS TO HAZARDOUS
LIVE CIRCUITS, AND SHOULD ONLY BE PERFORMED BY QUALIFIED
SERVICE PERSONNEL. MORE THAN ONE SWITCH MAY BE REQUIRED
TO DE-ENERGIZE UNIT BEFORE SERVICING.
12/03
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
119
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder
4.4.2 Preparing the Recorder for Startup
Introduction
Before applying power to the recorder, complete these preparation tasks.
ATTENTION
Never move the pen arms when the unit is operating unless adjusting the pen alignment as
described in Section 8.
WARNING
SHOCK HAZARD
When the unit is powered a potentially lethal shock hazard exists at the AC line connections at TB1 on
each printed circuit assembly (behing the chart plate). Make sure the unit power is disconnected before
starting the procedure. More than one switch may be required to de-energize the recorder.
Failure to observe this precaution can result in exposure to a potentially lethal shock hazard.
Procedure
Refer to Figure 4-4 to identify the basic chart plate components and follow the procedure in Table 4-20 to
prepare the recorder for operation.
Table 4-20 Preparing the Recorder for Operation
Step
Action
Open the door of the recorder.
1
2
Pull up on the pen lifter to raise the pen(s) from the chart plate and remove the protective cap
from each pen tip. Lift the locking clip on the chart hub.
Slip the new chart under the pen lifter, pen and time index, and press it into place over the
chart hub.
3
4
Turn the chart until the desired time line on the chart is aligned with the time index on the
chart plate and pen 1 before closing the locking clip on the hub. Push down on the lifter to
return the pen(s) to the chart.
CAUTION: Do not try to rotate the hub
Time index
Pen lifter
Large chart
hub
24213
Figure 4-4 Basic Chart Plate Components
120
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
12/03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration, Startup, and Operation
of Recorder with Display
4.4.3 Running the Optional Step Test
Introduction
You can test the recorder’s mechanical operation by running a step test. This test is initiated using the
keypad as described in Table 4-21.
This test prints a step pattern, which is independent of any chart settings, with horizontal lines drawn by
both pens at each 10 % increment on the chart (see Figure 4-5).
WARNING
SHOCK HAZARD
When the unit is powered a potentially lethal shock hazard exists at the AC line connections at TB1 on
each printed circuit assembly (behing the chart plate). Make sure the unit power is disconnected before
starting the procedure. More than one switch may be required to de-energize the recorder.
Failure to observe this precaution can result in exposure to a potentially lethal shock hazard.
The test will run for one complete revolution of the chart before it stops itself. The chart revolution for the
test takes approximately 2 minutes, regardless of configured chart speed. However, the test can be
terminated at any time by pressing the DISP key.
Additional automatic self-tests
At power-up the recorder runs self-diagnostics on the printed circuit assembly for each pen. See Section
4.5.1.4 and Section 8 – Troubleshooting and Pen Alignment of Recorder with Display for more information
about these diagnostic tests.
Procedure
Table 4-21 Procedure for Running the Step Test
Step
1
Press
Action/Result
Make sure the cap is removed from the tip of each pen and the chart is
installed. (If you plan to store or ship the recorder, save the protective caps
for the pen tips. Replace them if the recorder is taken out of operation.)
2
Being careful of the shock hazard at TB1, swing out the chart plate and
set SW5 on the printed circuit assembly on the right (pen 1) to the setup
position, toward the top of the board.
Be certain that the Lockout level is "CAL" or "NONE". The self-test will not
run otherwise.
Apply power to the recorder.
3
4
Until INP 1 indicator is lit on the left side of the operator interface.
FUNC
12/03
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
121
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder
Step
5
Press
Action/Result
You will see:
DISP
Upper Display
PASS
and
Lower Display
SLF TST
MAN
AUTO
RESET
Refer to Section 8 if step test fails.
together
Check to see that the recorder is generating a step pattern on the chart as
shown in Figure 4-5.
6
7
At the completion of the test (after one revolution of the chart), the recorder
will automatically return to normal operation.
Lights INP 2 indicator (if recorder has 2 pens)
You will see:
FUNC
Upper Display
(value)
Lower Display
INP
Repeat Steps 4 and 5 to test pen 2 operation.
Terminates the test at any time.
8
DISP
Chart step pattern
Figure 4-5 is a typical chart step pattern generated by the recorder in the test.
24141
Figure 4-5 Typical Step Test Chart Patterns
122
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
12/03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration, Startup, and Operation
of Recorder with Display
4.4.4 Completing Preparation and Startup
4.4.4.1 Overview
Introduction
Once the recorder is set up, mounted, wired, and the chart has been installed, the only remaining tasks are:
•
•
•
•
setting the chart time and applying the power (see Subsection 4.4.4.2)
checking the self-diagnostic tests (see Subsection 4.4.4.3)
checking the displays and keys (see Subsection 4.4.4.4)
starting operation (see Subsection 4.4.4.5)
4.4.4.2 Set chart time and apply power
Procedure
Table 4-22 Procedure for Setting Chart Time and Applying Power
Step
Action
Open the door.
1
2
3
Pull up the pen lifter to raise the pen(s) from the chart plate. Lift locking clip on the chart hub.
Turn the chart until the desired time line on the chart is aligned with the time index on the chart
plate and pen 1 before closing the locking clip on the hub. Push down on the lifter to return the
pen(s) to the chart.
CAUTION: Do not try to rotate the hub.
Close the door and apply power.
4
5
The pen(s) will move into position and the recorder pen will start to track the value specified
using the “PENIN” parameter in the pen set up group (see Subsection 4.3.8).
Time index
Pen lifter
Large chart
hub
24212
Figure 4-6 Setting Chart Time to Time Index
12/03
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
123
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder
4.4.4.3 Diagnostic tests
Tests run automatically
When the recorder is powered-up, self-diagnostics are run by the software.
As the tests in Table 4-23 are run, the display indicates whether the tests were passed or failed as described
below.
Table 4-23 Power-Up Diagnostic Tests
Lower Display
Upper Display
PASS or FAIL
PASS or FAIL
PASS or FAIL
RAMTST
CFGTST (configuration checksum)
CALTST (working calibration)
Status of tests displayed
As the tests are run, the lower line of the display shows which test is running. The upper line of the display
indicates the status. If any of these tests fail, “FAIL” appears momentarily in the upper display, then a
display test is run. The display changes to show the value of the process variable on the top line, and the
error message for the failed test on the second line.
In addition, if the control group parameter “CONTRL” has a value of “ENAB” when the test is failed, the
message “FAILSF” (failsafe) will alternate with error message for the test, and the controller will be in
manual mode. When the “FAILSF” message is displayed, it indicates that the recorder control output has
been driven to the value assigned to the control group “FAILSF” parameter.
By default, when the recorder is powered up the display will be for pen 1. Therefore, when the power up
tests run, the “PASS” and “FAIL” messages will apply only to the printed circuit assembly associated with
pen 1. However, in a 2-pen recorder the tests will also be run on the printed circuit assembly for pen 2. If
the pen 2 assembly fails one of the tests, the message “P2 ERR” will be displayed, along with any error
messages from the pen 1 tests.
Section 8 contains additional information about self-diagnostics, and suggested remedies if a problem is
detected.
124
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
12/03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration, Startup, and Operation
of Recorder with Display
4.4.4.4 Check the displays and keys
Procedure
Table 4-24 Procedure for Testing the Displays and Keys
Press
Result
The recorder runs a display test. All the displays will light for 10 seconds, then
the displays will look like this:
SET
UP
Upper Display
KEYS
and hold in,
then
Lower Display
TRY
FUNC
at the same time
Press each key to see if When the key is pressed, the lower display indicates the name of the key
it works pressed.*
Key Pressed
Lower Display
SET
SET UP
FUNC
FUNC
DISP
DISP
MAN/AUTO/RESET
AUTO
INCR
DECR
If pressing a key does not display its name, the display/keypad assembly is
defective. Replace it as described in Section 9 – Replacing Hardware
Assemblies.
* If no key is pressed for 30 seconds, the test times out and the recorder exits the key test.
Key Error message
When a key is pressed and the prompt “KEY ERROR” appears in the lower display, the message is not
associated with the display and keypad test. This message will be displayed when the operator presses a
key that is invalid for the recorder’s configuration. The “KEY ERROR” message will be displayed during
normal operation if one of the following conditions is met.
•
•
The parameter normally called up by the key is not available.
The recorder is not in Set Up mode, so the recorder can not respond to the key; press the SET UP
key first.
•
•
The key is not valid because the recorder is not set up for control.
The key malfunctions; perform keypad test.
12/03
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
125
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder
4.4.4.5 Startup procedure
Procedure
Use the procedure listed in Table 4-25 to start the recorder.
Open the recorder door (if the recorder does not have the optional keypad on the outside of the door).
Apply power and wait for the recorder to run its power-up tests.
ATTENTION
If FAILSF or another error message starts blinking in the lower display, refer to Section 8 for
troubleshooting information.
For recorders with control on both pens, be sure the INP ‘1’ indication is lit for steps 2 to 6. If INP 1
is not lit, press the FUNC key until “1” is lit when “INP” is displayed.
Table 4-25 Procedure for Starting the Recorder
Step
1
Operation
Pen check
Press
Action/Result
For models without outputs, check that the pen is
operating and skip to Step 4.
Select manual
mode
Until “M” indicator is ON. Be sure INP 1 indicator is lit.
If it is not, press FUNC key. The recorder is in
2
MAN
AUTO
RESET
manual mode and the Output (OT) in percent is
displayed in the lower display.
Calls up OT value in the lower display.
DISP
Adjust the output
Adjust the output value and ensure that the final
control element is functioning correctly.
Upper Display
3
or
shows the input value.
Lower Display
shows OT and the output
value in %.
Confirm correct
configuration.
If you want to check the recorder’s configuration, follow
the procedure described earlier in this section. If you
try to change a value and can not, a lockout is
enabled; see Subsection 4.3.19.
4
SET
UP
126
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
12/03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration, Startup, and Operation
of Recorder with Display
Step
5
Operation
Press
DISP
until
Action/Result
Upper Display
Lower Display
Enter the setpoint
shows the input (PV) value.
SP and the setpoint value for
the selected channel.
Adjust the setpoint to the value at which you want the
process variable maintained.
or
Select automatic
mode
Until “A” indicator is ON.
The recorder is in Automatic mode.
6
MAN
AUTO
RESET
The recorder will automatically adjust the output to
maintain the process variable at setpoint as tracked by
the pen trace.
Start up Controller
#2
Until INP 2 indicator on left side of display is lit.
7
8
FUNC
For recorders with two control outputs enabled, repeat
steps 2 to 6 for the second control output, but be sure
INP “2” indicator is lit instead of INP “1”.
Exit Startup
Close the door and monitor the operation.
12/03
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
127
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder
4.5 Operation of Recorder with Display and Keypad
4.5.1 Monitoring Your Recorder
4.5.1.1 Overview
Introduction
In addition to the historical chart record, you can monitor the recorder’s indicators and displays to see real
time values of inputs. If control is enabled, then setpoint, output, and deviation values can also be
displayed.
Set up values can also be viewed. Depending on the lockout status, configuration values may also be
changed.
As a background task the recorder runs self-diagnostics on the printed circuit assemblies for the pens as
described in Section 8 – Troubleshooting and Pen Alignment of Recorder with Display. If a test is failed,
configuration, a “failsafe” output value may be used for control in case of malfunction, as described in
Section 8.
4.5.1.2 Operator interface
Display
The indicators and displays on the operator interface let you see what is happening to your process and
how the recorder is responding. Figure 4-7 is a view of the operator interface. A description of the
displays and indicators is included.
Upper Display - four characters
Normal operation - Displays process variable
(PV) for the selected input channel.
Indicates temperature
units of PV on display.
Configuration mode - Displays selection or
parameter value.
Data displayed
is for input
Channel 1 or 2
SET
UP
FUNC
INP
1
1
2
2
F
C
MAN
AUTO
OUT
DISP
Output relay 1 or 2
is ON, when lit.
M
A
L
R
Lower Display - six characters
Normal operation - Displays selected
operating parameter label and value.
With totalization, shows totalizer value.
Configuration mode - Displays Set Up group and
function parameters.
Indicates controller mode:
M = Manual
A = Automatic
When either of the remote switches
is set for SP2, or when NumSPs = TWO
L = Setpoint 1 (SP) active
R = Setpoint 2 (S2) active
Otherwise, neither indicator
is used.
24278
Figure 4-7 Operator Interface
128
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
12/03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration, Startup, and Operation
of Recorder with Display
Meaning of indicators
During normal operation, the indicators will light for the reasons shown in Table 4-26.
Table 4-26 Meaning of Indicators
Indicator
Definition when lit
INP 1 2
OUT 1 2
A or M
Data displayed is for channel 1 or 2
Output relay 1 or 2 is ON
Indicates the mode of operation:
A = Automatic
M = Manual
F or C
Indicates the temperature units of PV:
F = Fahrenheit
C = Celsius
R or L
L = Setpoint 1 (SP) active; R = Setpoint 2 (S2) active
Keystroke is invalid.
KEYERR
(in lower display)
12/03
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
129
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder
4.5.1.3 Viewing the operating parameters
Contents of display
The upper display uses four characters to display the value of the input. During normal operation, you can
view various real time values and setpoints in the lower six-character display if the recorder supports
control. Each value will be labeled. Press the DISP key to scroll through the displayed values listed in
Table 4-27. If the recorder does not support control, then only the label “INP” or the totalizer value will
appear in the lower display. (The input value will be in the upper display.)
The display shows only those parameters and values that apply to your specific model and the way in
which it was configured. For recorders with two pens, remember that any controller-related values
displayed correspond with the lighted INP indicator. “1” means that the values apply to the pen 1 input
channel and “2” means that the values apply to the pen 2 input channel. Press FUNC key to toggle
between input 1 and input 2.
Table 4-27 Lower Display Operating Parameter Labels
Label
Description
Process variable value of currently selected input; if the recorder does not support
options, then this label is always displayed. In this case the other parameters listed
below are not applicable.
INP
Controller output in percent for selected channel’s control loop
Setpoint for selected channel
OT *
SP *
S2 *
Second setpoint for selected channel; this setpoint is used only if control group
NumSPs = TWO, or if recorder supports digital inputs, and is configured to use this
alternate setpoint in case an external event triggers the “remote switch”.
If a second setpoint is available (because control set up group NumSPs = TWO), use
this to select Setpoint 1 or Setpoint 2.
UseSPn *
Process variable deviation from setpoint currently being used.
DE
If totalizer is being used, the totalized value will be in the lower display (no label). To
see the scale factor applicable to this value, see the totalizer set up group.
[nnnnnn]
If the optional timer is active, either the time remaining on the timer (Hrs:Min), or
*
*
elapsed time (Hrs:Min) will be displayed. If the “clock hand” is not moving, the timer is
not running.
Select which setpoint program to run; n = 1 to 4.
SPRG n *
If the optional Setpoint Program feature is currently executing a program, the status
“RUN” or “HOLD” will also be displayed as part of the display cycle.
RUN or
HOLD *
See Appendix C for detailed instructions for executing a Setpoint Program.
Currently executing setpoint program segment (N) and time remaining for segment
(nn.nn) in hours and minutes.
N nn.nn
REC nn
Setpoint program cycles remaining. Displayed only if the program was set to run
more than one cycle, and if the program is not executing the last of multiple cycles.
Status of Accutune II. Displayed only if Accutune is enabled. See Appendix D for
TuneON or
detailed Accutune instructions.
TuneOF *
*You can press ▲ or ▼or to change the value or initiate some action when this parameter is displayed.
130
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
12/03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration, Startup, and Operation
of Recorder with Display
4.5.1.4 Diagnostic Error Messages
Recorders with displays run background tests as described in Section 8 – Troubleshooting and Pen
Alignment of Recorders with Display to verify data and memory integrity. If there is a malfunction, an error
message will blink in the lower display. If more than one self-diagnostic test fails, the display will cycle
through the appropriate error messages.
A list of background test error messages is in Table 4-28.
If any of these error messages are displayed, refer to Section 8 for information on correcting the problem.
In addition, an error message will be displayed if the operator tries to run a setpoint program in which the
number of the ending segment is lower than the segment number of the start segment. See Appendix C for
details.
Table 4-28 Error Messages
Prompt
Description
Indicates failure of the calibration test.
CALERR
CFGERR
EEFAIL
FAILSF
INP FL
Indicates failure of the configuration test.
Unable to write to nonvolatile memory
Failsafe value being used as output
Two consecutive failures of input integration
Input out-of-range
INPRNG
Indicates error on channel other than the one on display.
P1 ERR or
P2 ERR
Indicates failure of the RAM test.
RAMTST
SEGERR
Indicates that the number of the setpoint program’s end segment is lower
than the segment number of the start segment.
ATTENTION
In addition to error messages, the recorder will display special status messages when optional
features are active.
• If the lower display flashes “TUNING”, the recorder is in the process of automatically
determining tuning parameters using the Accutune II feature described in Appendix D.
• If the lower display flashes “RUN n” or “HOLD”, the recorder is executing setpoint program “n”
as described in Appendix C, and the run or hold action was initiated locally.
• If the lower display flashes “run n” or “hold”, the recorder is executing setpoint program “n”,
and the run or hold action was initiated remotely.
12/03
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
131
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder
4.5.2 Operator Functions
4.5.2.1 Overview
Actions an operator can initiate
An operator can do the following:
•
•
•
change the control mode (AUTO/MANUAL) and adjust the output manually (see Subsection 4.5.2.2)
change the setpoint (see Subsection 4.5.2.3)
check the alarm setpoints; the operator may also be able to change the setpoints, depending on the
configured value of the “LOCK” parameter (see Subsection 4.5.2.4)
•
•
•
•
•
run a key test (see Subsection 4.4.4.4)
restore factory or field calibration values (see Subsection 4.5.2.5)
if the recorder is a limit controller, reset the recorder to take it out of the limit state (see Subsection
•
•
if the recorder supports Setpoint Programming, run a program (see Appendix C)
if the recorder supports Accutune II, use this automatic tuning feature (see Appendix D)
Note that being able to perform some actions depends upon how the recorder was configured and the
features supplied on the recorder model. For example, control mode and setpoint only apply to units having
optional output relays that have been configured for use in control.
INP (Input) indicator
Remember that any value displayed for a 2-pen recorder will be identified by the “1” or “2” at the left of
the display, indicating the pen channel to which the value applies.
Press the FUNC key to toggle between pen channels.
132
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
12/03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration, Startup, and Operation
of Recorder with Display
4.5.2.2 Changing Control Mode and Adjusting Output Manually
Available modes
The recorder can operate in one of two modes.
•
Manual: When switched to manual mode, the recorder holds its output at the last value used during
automatic operation and stops adjusting the output for changes in process variable. In manual, the
operator uses the keypad to adjust the output by changing the value shown in the upper display.
If the switch to manual is the result of an input failure sending the channel to failsafe operation, the
output value displayed when the controller first switches to manual will be the value of the “FAILSF”
parameter in the control set up group. This “FAILSF” value is expressed as a percentage. The output
can be any value between 0 % and 100 %.
•
Automatic with Local Setpoint: In automatic local mode, the recorder uses the local setpoint and
automatically adjusts the output to maintain the setpoint at the desired value. In this mode you can
adjust the setpoint as described in Subsection 4.5.2.3.
Procedure for selecting manual or automatic mode
Table 4-29 includes procedures for selecting automatic or manual mode, and for changing the output while
in manual.
Table 4-29 Procedure for Selecting Automatic or Manual Mode
Step
1
Operation
Press
Action/Result
Selecting automatic
mode
Until “A” indicator is ON.
The recorder regulates its output to maintain the PV at
the desired setpoint.
MAN
AUTO
RESET
Selecting manual
mode
Until “M” indicator is ON.
2
MAN
AUTO
RESET
The recorder holds its output at the last value used
during automatic operation and stops adjusting the
output for changes in setpoint or process variable.
• If you get a “KEYERR” prompt, be sure control has
been enabled through configuration as described
earlier in this section.
Adjust the output in
manual mode
Adjust the output value while in manual mode.
Upper Display
3
4
or
shows the input value.
Lower Display
shows OT and the output value
in % for the selected channel.
Return to automatic
mode
“A” indicator appears indicating automatic mode.
MAN
AUTO
RESET
12/03
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
133
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder
4.5.2.3 Changing the Control Setpoint
Procedure
The recorder can be set up for control on pen channel 1 and/or 2 as described earlier in this section. Follow
Table 4-30 Procedure for Changing the Control Setpoints
Step
1
Operation
Press
Action/Result
Select setpoint for
the pen 1 channel
(input 1).
until you see:.
Upper Display
DISP
shows the input value.
Lower Display
shows SP and the setpoint
value for the selected channel.
to change the setpoint to the desired value.
or
Select setpoint for
pen 2 (input 2)
2
Until “INP 2” indicator lights.
FUNC
DISP
until you see:.
Upper Display
shows the input value.
Lower Display
shows S2 and the second
setpoint for the selected
channel.
to change the setpoint to the desired value.
or
Return to input 1
parameters for
display
3
to light “INP 1” indicator
FUNC
If remote switch is set to SP2 then DISP will allow setting of second setpoint (S2).
134
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
12/03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration, Startup, and Operation
of Recorder with Display
4.5.2.4 Viewing and Changing Alarm Setpoints
Introduction
If the recorder hardware supports outputs, one or both relays can be used for alarming. An alarm is an
indication that an event specified during configuration (process variable, for example) has exceeded one or
more alarm limits. There are two alarms available for each pen (assuming no relay is being used for
control). Each alarm has two setpoints. There are two alarm output selections, high and low. During
configuration, each alarm setpoint is configured to alarm either high or low.
The alarm setpoints can be changed by the operator if the alarm parameters are not locked (see Subsection
4.3.19). If a recorder output is being used for control, that output is not available as an alarm and
the prompts will not appear.
Procedure
The procedure for displaying and changing the alarm setpoints is listed in Table 4-31.
Table 4-31 Procedure for Displaying or Changing the Alarm Setpoints
Step
1
Operation
Press
Action/Result
Access the Alarm Set
Up group
Until you see:
Upper Display
SET
UP
SET
Lower Display
ALARMS
Access the Alarm
Setpoint Values
Until you display the desired alarm setpoint and its
value. Their order of appearance is shown below.
2
FUNC
Upper Display
The alarm setpoint
value
Lower Display
A1S1 VA = (Alarm 1, Setpoint 1 value)
A1S2 VA = (Alarm 1, Setpoint 2 value)
A2S1 VA = (Alarm 2, Setpoint 1 value)
A2S2 VA = (Alarm 2, Setpoint 2 value)
Change any alarm setpoint value you select in the
upper display.
or
Return to normal
operation
Returns to normal operation.
3
DISP
12/03
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
135
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder
4.5.2.5 Selecting Factory or Field Calibration Values
Introduction
Recorders are calibrated at the factory. The calibration values for each pen channel are stored on the
printed circuit assembly associated with the pen. In addition, provision is made for the storage of field
calibration values. The procedure for calibrating an input is provided in Section 5 – Input and Output
Calibration for Recorder with Display. Entering field calibration values does not affect the stored factory
calibration.
The “LD CAL” parameter in the input set up group for each pen channel permits you to specify whether
factory or field calibration values are to be used by the recorder.
Procedure
ATTENTION
If you change the type of input used by the recorder, you must change the setting of the “IN TYP”
changing the settings of hardware switches at SW6 (see Subsection 4.3.5.2).
Table 4-32 Procedure for Selecting Factory or Field Calibration Values
Step
1
Press
Action
Select the desired input (indicator INP 1 or INP 2).
FUNC
Until you see:
Upper Display
SET
2
SET
UP
Lower Display
INPUT
Until you see:
Upper
3
FUNC
Present value
Lower
LD CAL
(FAC or FLD)
4
5
Select FAC (factory) or FLD (field).
or
ATTENTION
Until field calibration has been done,
FLD uses the same calibration values as FAC. When field calibration is
performed, the value of LD CAL is automatically set to FLD at the completion
of the field calibration operation.
Be sure the correct sensor is connected to the input terminals and resume
normal operation.
136
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
12/03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration, Startup, and Operation
of Recorder with Display
4.5.2.6 Resetting the Totalizer
Introduction
The models having a display and keypad are available with an optional totalizer to calculate and display the
total flow volume as measured by the pen channel’s input. The displayed value is six digits with a
configurable scale factor. The scale factor is displayed as “En”, where n is 10n. For example:
•
•
•
If the display reads “189 E0”, then the totalized value since last reset is 189 x 100 or 189.
If the display reads “189 E3”, then the totalized value since last reset is 189 x 103 or 189,000.
If the display reads “189” E8”, then the totalized value since the last reset is 189 x 108 or
18,900,000,000.
The value of the totalizer set up group parameter “RSTABL” (resettable) determines whether and how the
totalizer can be reset. If RSTABL = KEY, then the totalizer can be reset using the procedure in
Table 4-33. If RSTABL is set to REM1 or REM2, the totalizer will be reset by Digital Input 1 or Digital
Input 2, respectively.
Reset procedure
Table 4-33 Procedure for Resetting Totalizer
Step
1
Press
Action/Result
Select channel.
FUNC
2
3
Upper Display
SETUP
SET
UP
Lower Display
TOTAL
If “TOTAL” doesn’t appear or prompt access
is declined, check “LOCK” configuration.
until you see
You will see:
Upper Display
NO
FUNC
Lower Display
RESET
You will see:
Upper Display
YES
4
Lower Display
RESET
The totalizer will reset to zero.
5
6
FUNC
DISP
The recorder will return to the same state it was in before
configuration (set up) mode was entered.
The value of the RESET parameter will automatically be returned
to NO after the reset operation.
12/03
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
137
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder
4.5.2.7 Starting the Timer
Introduction
The DR4300 is available with an optional timer. This timer can be configured to be started by Alarm 1 or
the keypad. (If the recorder supports digital inputs, one can be used to trigger the timer. This remote
switch is independent of whether the timer is configured to start with the alarm or the keypad.)
Once the timer has been started, it cannot be stopped with the Increment and Decrement keys (see Step 3
below).
At the end of timer period Relay 2 will be energized, and remain energized until the timer is reset.
•
•
If the timer set up group parameter START = KEY, then restarting the timer will involve pushing the
Increment or Decrement key twice while the timer is displayed: once to reset the timer and de-
energize Relay 2, and the second to start the timer.
If the timer set up group START = AL1, then when Alarm 1 toggles (goes inactive, then active again)
the timer is reset and restarted. When the timer is configured to start via Alarm 1, the timer can be
reset (but not restarted) with the Increment or Decrement key. If the Alarm 1 relay is still energized
when you reset the timer with the key, then the timer will be restarted immediately.
Procedure
Use the procedure in Table 4-34 to start the timer.
Table 4-34 Procedure for Starting Timer
Step
1
Press
Action/Result
where n.nn is:
† n.nn
DISP
• 0.00 if the timer is configured to show elapsed
time, or
until you see
• the hours and minutes set on the timer if it is
configured to show time remaining.
You will see the “clock hand” start to move:
2
3
or
• counterclockwise if the timer is configured to show elapsed time,
or
• clockwise if the timer is configured to show time remaining.
After a minute, the time indication will change.
The timer cannot be stopped with the Increment or Decrement key.
To stop the timer go into the timer set up group and disable the
timer.
138
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
12/03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration, Startup, and Operation
of Recorder with Display
4.5.2.8 Resetting the Limit Controller
Introduction
The DR4300 is available as a limit controller. On each pen channel’s printed circuit assembly Relay 1 is
used for limit control. When the recorder detects that the input has exceeded the limit (or fallen below the
limit, depending on how the unit is configured) the controller goes to the limit state: Relay 1 is
de-energized.
Limit controller operator interface
The operator interface on a limit controller is the same as that of other models having a display and keypad.
The MAN/AUTO/RESET key functions as a reset only. Manual and Auto mode do not apply to the limit
controller.
When the recorder’s controller goes to the limit state (relay de-energized), the operator will be alerted to
the limit state by a message on the bottom line of the display.
•
If the input that triggered the limit state is on the pen channel being displayed, the message will be
“LIMIT”.
•
If the input that triggered the limit state is on the other pen channel, the message will be “Pn ERR”
(where n is the limit state’s pen channel). Pressing the “FUNC” key to switch channels will display
the “LIMIT” message.
Reset procedure
Table 4-35 Procedure for Resetting Limit Controller
Press Action
Step
1
Correct the cause of the limit state.
2
Select the desired input (indicator INP 1 or INP 2).
FUNC
3
MAN
AUTO
RESET
Press the RESET key.* The limit controller will resume normal operation,
monitoring the value of the input and comparing it to the configured limit value.
* This refers to the MAN/AUTO/RESET key on the keypad, NOT the reset switch SW2 on the printed
circuit assembly for the pen channel.
The Limit Controller may also be reset remotely; see XRSET function in Subsection 4.3.22.
Output LED is on when relay is energized (not in limit).
12/03
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
139
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder
140
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
12/03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Input and Output Calibration for Recorder with Display
5. Input and Output Calibration for Recorder with Display
5.1 Overview
Introduction
This section explains how to field calibrate analog inputs, as well as a 4 to 20 mA current output for a model
having a display and keypad.
Because the recorder stores both factory and field calibration values for inputs in memory, you can easily
select either factory or field calibration values for use by the recorder using the procedure given in
Subsection 4.5.2.5.
To calibrate an input:
•
•
•
•
Determine the minimum and maximum range values to be used for calibration (see Subsection 5.2).
Set up and wire the input for calibration (see Subsection 5.4).
Use the parameters in the calibration set up group to store field calibration values in the recorder’s
memory (see Subsection 5.5).
What’s in this section?
The following is a list of the topics covered in this section.
Topic
See Page
5.1 Overview
5.2 Input Calibration Minimum and Maximum Range Values
5.3 Input Calibration Preliminary Information
5.4 Input Calibration Set Up and Wiring
5.5 Input Calibration Procedure
5.6 Current Output Calibration
!
WARNING—SHOCK HAZARD
INPUT CALIBRATION MAY REQUIRE ACCESS TO HAZARDOUS LIVE
CIRCUITS, AND SHOULD ONLY BE PERFORMED BY QUALIFIED
SERVICE PERSONNEL. MORE THAN ONE SWITCH MAY BE REQUIRED
TO DE-ENERGIZE UNIT BEFORE CALIBRATION.
12/03
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
141
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder
5.2 Input Calibration Minimum and Maximum Range Values
Minimum and maximum range values
You should calibrate the recorder for the minimum (0 %) and maximum (100 %) range values of your
particular sensor. If your recorder has two (pens) inputs, calibrate each input separately.
Make sure the correct input is on display INP1 or INP2; use the FUNC key to select the input.
Select the voltage or resistance equivalent for 0 % and 100 % range values from Table 5-1. Use these values
when calibrating your recorder.
142
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
12/03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Input and Output Calibration for Recorder with Display
Table 5-1 Voltage and Resistance Equivalents for 0 % and 100 % Range Values
Sensor Type
PV Input Range
Range Values*
68 °F/20 °C
Thermocouples
°F
°C
0 %
100 %
105 to 3300
–454 to 1832
–200 to 1100
0 to 1600
41 to 1816
–270 to 1000
–129 to 593
–18 to 871
–7 to 410
0 mV
13.769 mV
76.373 mV
44.555 mV
50.060 mV
22.400 mV
54.856 mV
22.255 mV
71.773 mV
47.513 mV
20.281 mV
17.998 mV
19.097 mV
15.771 mV
37.075 mV
B
–9.835 mV
–6.472 mV
–0.886 mV
–0.334 mV
–5.822 mV
–1.114 mV
–0.000 mV
–0.461 mV
–0.090 mV
–0.092 mV
–6.187 mV
–4.149 mV
-0.234 mV
1.192 mV
1.019 mV
0.798 mV
E
E (low)
J
J (low)
K
20 to 770
–320 to 2500
–20 to 1000
32 to 2500
0 to 2372
–196 to 1371
–29 to 538
0 to 1371
K (low)
Ni-Ni-Moly
Nicrosil-Nisil
R
0.755 mV
0.525 mV
0.111 mV
0.113 mV
0.789 mV
–17.8 to 1300
–18 to 1704
–18 to 1704
–251 to 371
–129 to 316
–18 to 2315
0 to 3100
0 to 3100
S
–420 to 700
–200 to 600
0 to 4200
T
T (low)
W5W26
RTD
0.273 mV
–300 to 900
–130 to 392
–238 to 482
–184 to 482
–90 to 200
–150 to 250
100 Ω **
100 Ω (low)**
100 Ω (T)***
25.18 Ω
64.30 Ω
38.79 Ω
274.96 Ω
175.84 Ω
195.57 Ω
0 mA to 20 mA
0 mA
4 mA
0 mV
0 mV
0 mV
0 V
20 mA
20 mA
10 mV
100 mV
200 mV
1 V
Milliamps
4 mA to 20 mA
0 mV to 10 mV
0 mV to 100 mV
0 mV to 200 mV
0 V to 1 V
Millivolts
Volts
0 V to 2 V
0 V
2 V
1 V to 5 V
1 V
5 V
0 V to 5 V
0 V
5 V
0 V to 10 V
0 V
10 V
2 V to 10 V
2 V
10 V
*Range values for thermocouples are based on a cold junction temperature of 32 °F (0 °C). These values must be adjusted for the
actual cold junction temperature when using the ambient temperature method for calibrating thermocouple inputs.
** IEC Alpha = 0.00385
*** Alpha = 0.00391
12/03
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
143
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder
5.3 Input Calibration Preliminary Information
Equipment needed
Table 5-2 lists the equipment required to calibrate various types of inputs. You will also need a medium size
bladed screwdriver for general use and a small bladed screwdriver for use with the screws on the connector
plugs.
Table 5-2 Equipment Needed for Calibration
Type of Input
Equipment Needed
• A compensated calibrator with ± 0.02 % accuracy.
Thermocouple Inputs
(Compensated Calibrator)
• Thermocouple extension wire that corresponds with the type of
thermocouple that will be used with the recorder input.
• A calibrating device with ± 0.02 % accuracy for use as a signal source
such as a millivolt source.
Thermocouple Inputs
(Ice Bath)
• Thermocouple extension wire that corresponds with the type of
thermocouple that will be used with the recorder input.
• Two insulated copper leads for connecting the thermocouple
extension wire from the ice baths to the precision calibrator.
• Two containers of crushed ice, or an ice point reference.
• A resistance decade box, with ± 0.02 % accuracy, capable of
providing stepped resistance values over a minimum range of 0 ohms
to 1400 ohms with a resolution of 0.01 ohm.
RTD (Resistance Temperature
Detector)
• Three insulated copper leads for connecting the decade box to the
recorder.
• A calibrating device with ± 0.02 % accuracy for use as a signal source.
Milliamp, Millivolt, and Volts
Inputs
• Two insulated copper leads for connecting the calibrator to the
recorder.
144
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
12/03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Input and Output Calibration for Recorder with Display
Disconnect the field wiring
Depending on which input (1 or 2) you plan to calibrate, tag and disconnect any field wiring connected to
the input terminals on the printed circuit assembly for the appropriate pen channel. Refer to Figure 5-1 and
follow the procedure in Table 5-3.
Table 5-3 Disconnect the Field Wiring
Step
1
Action
Remove the power from the recorder, open the door on the recorder, and swing the chart plate
out.
Depending on the input (1 or 2) you are going to calibrate, disconnect the input connections
from terminal block TB2 on the right edge of the applicable printed circuit assembly. See
Figure 5-1 for the location of the circuit boards and input connectors.
2
Main PCA
Main PCA
Pen 2
Pen 1
TB2
TB2
TB1
TB1
24091
TB2
+
–
R
Figure 5-1 Location of the Input Connections on the Input Boards
12/03
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
145
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder
5.4 Input Calibration Set Up and Wiring
5.4.1 General Calibration Set Up
DIP switch settings
Before starting the calibration activity, check that the input switches SW6 on the applicable printed circuit
assembly (pen 1 or pen 2) are set correctly for the type of sensor being calibrated. (See Section 4 –
Configuration, Startup, and Operation of Recorder With Display.)
General set up procedure
Table 5-4 lists the general set up procedure for all methods of calibration. Do this procedure and then refer
to the set up procedure and diagram specific to your input type.
Table 5-4 General Calibration Set Up Procedure
Step
1
Action
Set up and connect the calibrator to the input terminals for the applicable printed circuit
assembly in your recorder according to the type of input sensor being used. Refer to the
following figures for corresponding set-up diagrams:
•
•
•
•
Route leads (for example: copper leads or thermocouple extension wires) through a conduit
hole in the recorder case so that you will be able to close the chart plate.
2
3
Close the chart plate after you have completed the applicable calibration set up.
146
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
12/03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Input and Output Calibration for Recorder with Display
5.4.2 Thermocouple Inputs Using a Compensated Calibrator
Table 5-5 Set Up Wiring Procedure for Thermocouple Inputs
Using a Compensated Calibrator
Step
Action
Connect the thermocouple extension wire to the calibration source (see Figure 5-2).
1
2
Connect the other end of the thermocouple extension wires to the TB2 terminals on the printed
circuit assembly for the input channel being calibrated.
Main PCA
Main PCA
Pen 2
Pen 1
TB2
TB2
TB1
TB1
24825
TB2
+
–
R
Compensated
Calibrator
-
+
Thermocouple
extension wires
Figure 5-2 Calibration Set Up Diagram for Thermocouple Inputs
Using a Compensated Calibrator
12/03
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
147
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder
5.4.3 Thermocouple Inputs Using an Ice Bath or Ice Point Reference
Table 5-6 Set Up Wiring Procedure for Thermocouple Inputs Using an Ice Bath
Step
Action
Connect the copper leads to the calibration source (see Figure 5-3).
1
2
Connect a length of thermocouple extension wire to the end of each copper lead and insert the
junction points into the ice bath.
Connect the other end of the thermocouple extension wires to the TB2 terminals on the printed
circuit assembly for the input channel being calibrated.
3
Main PCA
Main PCA
Pen 2
Pen 1
TB2
TB2
TB1
TB1
24092
TB2
+
–
R
mV source
-
+
Thermocouple
extension wires
Containers of
crushed ice
Copper
wires
Figure 5-3 Calibration Set Up Diagram for Thermocouple Inputs Using an Ice Bath
148
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
12/03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Input and Output Calibration for Recorder with Display
5.4.4 RTD (Resistance Temperature Detector) Inputs
Table 5-7 Set Up Wiring Procedure for Calibrating RTD Inputs
Step
Action
Connect the copper wire to the calibration source (see Table 5-3).
1
2
Connect the other end of the copper wire to the TB2 terminals on the printed circuit assembly
for the input channel being calibrated.
Main PCA
Main PCA
Pen 2
Pen 1
TB2
TB2
TB1
TB1
24093
TB2
+
–
R
Decade box
-
+
Copper
wires
Figure 5-4 Calibration Set Up Diagram for RTD Inputs
12/03
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
149
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder
Millivolts, Volts and Milliamps inputs
Table 5-8 Set Up Wiring Procedure for Calibrating Millivolts, Volts, and Milliamps Inputs
Step
Action
Connect the copper wire to the calibration source (see Figure 5-5).
1
2
Connect the other end of the copper wire to the TB2 terminals on the printed circuit assembly
for the input channel being calibrated.
Main PCA
Main PCA
Pen 2
Pen 1
TB2
TB2
TB1
TB1
24094
TB2
+
–
R
Calibration source
-
+
Copper
wires
Figure 5-5 Calibration Set Up Diagram for Millivolts, Volts, and Milliamps Inputs
150
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
12/03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Input and Output Calibration for Recorder with Display
5.5 Input Calibration Procedure
Introduction
Before performing this procedure, be sure the recorder is wired for calibration as described in Subsection
5.4. Apply power and allow the recorder to warm up for 30 minutes before you calibrate.
Make sure “LOCK” is set to “NONE” (see Section 4 - Configuration, Startup and Operation of Recorder
with Display).
ATTENTION
For Milliamp inputs, be sure the current source is at zero before switching on the calibrator.
Do not switch the calibrator on/off while it is connected to the recorder’s input. Failure to observe
this precaution could result in damage to input circuits.
Calibration procedure sequence
The calibration procedure sequence for all inputs is listed in Table 5-9. The calibration procedure for inputs
1 and 2 is identical. The displays indicate the input number.
Press the FUNC key to change display as required (INP1 or INP2).
Table 5-9 Input Calibration Procedure Sequence
Step
1
Description
Press
Action/Result
Enter Calibration Mode
Upper Display
CAL
SET
UP
Lower Display
INPUT
until you see
If “CAL” doesn’t appear or prompt access is declined,
check “LOCK” configuration.
You will see:
Upper Display
DIS
FUNC
Lower Display
CAL IN
The calibration sequence is enabled and you will see:
Upper Display
BEGIN
Lower Display
CAL IN
12/03
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
151
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder
Step
2
Description
Calibrate 0 %
Press
FUNC
Action/Result
You will see:
Upper Display
APLY
Lower Display
INZERO
• Adjust your calibration device to an output signal equal
to the 0 % range value for your particular input type. See
Table 5-1 for Voltage or Resistance equivalents.
• Wait 60 seconds, then go to the next step.
Calibrate 100 %
You will see:
Upper Display
APLY
3
FUNC
Lower Display
INSPAN
Adjust your calibration device to an output signal equal to
the 100 % range value for your particular input type (see
Table 5-1 for voltage or resistance equivalents). Wait 60
seconds, then go to next step.
Exit the Calibration Mode
The recorder stores the calibration constants.
4
FUNC
The value of input set up group parameter “LD CAL” is set
to “FLD” (field).
The recorder begins to use the new field calibration values
for this channel.
Repeat this procedure for the other pen, if required.
152
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
12/03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Input and Output Calibration for Recorder with Display
5.6 Current Output Calibration
Introduction
Calibrate the recorder so that the output provides the required amount of current over the desired range. The
recorder can provide an output current range of from 0 to 20 milliamperes and can be calibrated at
4 mA for 0 % of output and 20 mA for 100 % of output, or at any other values between 0 mA and 20 mA.
Equipment needed
You will need a standard shop type milliammeter, with whatever accuracy is required, capable of measuring
0 milliamps to 20 milliamps.
Calibrator connections
Table 5-10 Set Up Wiring Procedure for Current Proportional Output
Step
1
Action
With the power off, door open, and the chart plate swung out; tag and disconnect field wiring
from the terminals on terminal block TB5 on the printed circuit assembly for pen 1 or pen 2 as
Observing polarity, connect a milliammeter’s leads to TB5 terminals.
2
3
Close the chart plate: apply power and allow the recorder to warm up 15 minutes before you
calibrate.
Main PCA
Main PCA
Pen 2
Pen 1
TB2
TB2
TB1
TB1
24189
TB5
1
Milliammeter
+
+
_
_
Figure 5-6 Test Equipment Connections for Calibrating Current Output
12/03
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
153
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder
Procedure
The procedure for calibrating the current proportional output is listed in Table 5-11. Make sure “LOCK” in
the Set Up group is set to “NONE.”
For display recorders with 2 pens, be sure the correct input is on display—INP 1 or INP 2 indicator is lit.
Press FUNC key to change input on display to agree with the control loop output to be calibrated.
Table 5-11 Procedure for Calibrating Current Output
Step
1
Description
Press
Action/Result
Enter Calibration Mode
Upper Display
CAL
SET
UP
until you see
Lower Display
CURENT
If “CAL” doesn’t appear or prompt access is denied, check
the “LOCK” configuration.
Calibrate 0 %
You will see:
Upper Display
2
FUNC
a value (approximately 365)
Lower Display
ZERO
Until the desired 0 % output is read on the milliammeter.
Use the values shown below depending on the action of
your recorder.
or
Calibrate 100 %
Stores the 0 % value and, you will see:
Upper Display
3
FUNC
a value (approximately 1800)
Lower Display
SPAN
Until the desired 100 % output is read on the milliammeter.
Use the values shown below depending on the action of
your recorder.
or
154
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
12/03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Input and Output Calibration for Recorder with Display
Step
4
Description
Press
FUNC
Action/Result
Exit Calibration Mode
The recorder stores the span value.
Repeat procedure for the other pen. Remove power from
recorder and disconnect the milliammeter and connect
output wiring.
To exit the calibration mode.
DISP
or
SET
UP
12/03
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
155
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder
156
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
12/03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Routine Maintenance
6. Routine Maintenance
6.1 Overview
Introduction
Unless the recorder’s location will expose it to dust, the DR4300 recorder does not require any periodic
maintenance except the replacement of the chart and ink cartridges.
This section provides instructions for replacing the chart and ink cartridge. It also contains tips for
maximizing the life of the pens, including recommended practices if the recorder is used in a dusty area.
ATTENTION
Humidity can affect the size of the chart, resulting in the pen being offset from the proper chart
increment. Instructions for aligning the pens are provided in Section 7 – Troubleshooting and Pen
Alignment for Recorder Without Display and Section 8 – Troubleshooting and Pen Alignment for
Recorder With Display.
What’s in this section?
The following is a list of the topics covered in this section.
Topic
See Page
6.1 Overview
6.2 Replacing the Chart
6.3 Replacing the Ink Cartridge
6.4 Maximizing Pen Life
12/03
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
157
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder
6.2 Replacing the Chart
Procedure
Table 6-1 Procedure for Replacing the Chart
Step
Action
Turn off the power to the recorder, then open the door.
1
2
3
4
Pull up on the pen lifter to raise the pen(s) from the chart plate.
Lift the chart from the hub, and slide it from under the pen(s) to remove it from the chart plate.
Slip the new chart under the pen lifter, pens and time index; and press the chart into place over
the chart hub.
Turn the chart until the desired time line on the chart is aligned with the time index on the chart
plate and pen 1 before closing the locking clip on the hub. Push down on the lifter to return the
pen(s) to the chart.
5
CAUTION: Do not try to rotate the hub
Close the door and apply power.
6
Notch for
Open
Pen
tip
pen tip
Ink
cartridge
clip
Pen arm
Clip
Time index
Pen lifter
Large chart
hub
24214
Figure 6-1 Replacing the Chart and Ink Cartridge
158
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
12/03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Routine Maintenance
6.3 Replacing the Ink Cartridge
Procedure
Table 6-2 Procedure for Replacing the Ink Cartridge
Step
Action
Remove the power from the recorder, then open the door.
Pull up on the pen lifter to raise the pen(s) from the chart plate.
1
2
ATTENTION Be careful not to move the pen arm while removing and installing the ink cartridge.
Unclip and remove the purple (pen 1) or red (pen 2) ink cartridge from the pen arm.
3
4
Remove the protective cap from the pen tip on the new cartridge and open its clip. (If you plan
to store or ship the recorder, save the protective cap.)
Slide the new cartridge onto the pen arm so that its tip fits into the notch at the end of the pen
arm and close the clip to secure the cartridge to the pen arm.
5
Push down the pen lifter to return the pen tip to the chart.
Close the door and apply power.
6
7
12/03
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
159
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder
6.4 Maximizing Pen Life
Steps for maximizing pen life
Table 6-3 lists steps that will help maximize the life of recorder pens.
Table 6-3 Maximizing Pen Life
Step
1
Action
Store the chart paper in a cool, clean dry place where the temperature does not exceed 40 °C
(104 °F) and the humidity is below 65 % RH.
Do not expose the pen tip and chart paper to abrasive chemicals or dust that cause excessive
pen wear.
2
3
4
5
If the recorder is used in a dusty atmosphere, provide a positive ‘clean air purge’ to minimize
dust particle accumulation on the chart paper.
Periodically clean the pen arm using a cotton swab dipped in alcohol. This is more important
when the recorder is located in a dusty environment and no ‘clean air purge’ is used.
Never let the pen tip ride on the chart plate when the paper is not present. Use the pen lifter to
raise the arm when changing the paper.
Keep the door closed while recording.
6
7
8
Always cover the pen arm tip with its protective cap when storing or shipping the recorder.
Be sure that the chart paper lays flat against the chart plate. Any ripple in the paper will cause
light pen printing.
Be sure the chart hub assembly is pushed onto the motor shaft so that it is flush with the chart
plate.
9
160
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
12/03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting and Pen Alignment
of Recorder without Display
7. Troubleshooting and Pen Alignment
of Basic Recorder without Display
7.1 Overview
Introduction
This section explains how to use observable symptoms of failure to troubleshoot the recorder models that
do not have a display.
•
To reduce recorder down-time, this section enables tracing trouble to a printed circuit assembly
(PCA)/hardware assembly level rather than to an individual component.
•
While troubleshooting is straightforward, we recommend that only trained service technicians repair
the recorder. SEE THE SHOCK HAZARD WARNING BELOW.
This section also includes instructions for aligning the pens.
What’s in this section?
The following is a list of the topics covered in this section.
Topic
See Page
7.1 Overview
7.2 Observable Symptoms of Failure
7.3 Troubleshooting Procedures
7.4 Alignment of Pen at Zero and 100 %
!
WARNING—SHOCK HAZARD
TROUBLESHOOTING MAY REQUIRE ACCESS TO HAZARDOUS LIVE
CIRCUITS, AND SHOULD ONLY BE PERFORMED BY QUALIFIED
SERVICE PERSONNEL. MORE THAN ONE SWITCH MAY BE REQUIRED
TO DE-ENERGIZE UNIT BEFORE SERVICING.
12/03
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
161
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder
Types of problems
Instrument performance can be adversely affected by installation and application problems as well as by
hardware problems. We recommend that you investigate the problems in the order listed below, and use the
information in this section to solve them. If replacement of any part is required, follow the procedures in
Section 9 – Replacing Hardware Assemblies.
•
•
•
Installation related problems
Application related problems
Hardware and software related problems
Installation related problems
Read Section 2 – Installation to make sure the DR4300 has been properly installed. Document 51-52-05-01
How to Apply Digital Instrumentation in Severe Electrical Noise Environments can provide additional
relevant information.
ATTENTION
System noise induced into the recorder may result in transient abnormalities in performance.
If system noise is suspected, completely isolate the recorder from all field wiring. Use calibration
sources to simulate PV and check all recorder and control functions; that is, pen functions, chart
trace, output, alarms, etc.
Application related problems
Review the application of the recorder; then, if necessary, direct your questions to the local sales office.
Hardware and software related problems
Observe the symptoms to identify typical failures which may occur in the recorder. Follow the
troubleshooting procedures to correct the problems.
162
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
12/03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting and Pen Alignment
of Recorder without Display
7.2 Observable Symptoms of Failure
Introduction
If erratic operation is observed, refer to the failure symptoms in Table 7-1, then follow the appropriate
troubleshooting procedure in Subection 7.3.
Symptoms
Compare your recorder’s symptoms with those shown in Table 7-1 and refer to the indicated subsection for
the appropriate troubleshooting procedure.
Table 7-1 Observable Symptoms of Failure
See
Symptom
Subsection
Recorder will not operate.
Recorder operation is normal but pen trace is incorrect.
Chart rotates at wrong speed or will not rotate (pen indication correct).
Pen remains at high end of range when input signal is low.
12/03
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
163
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder
7.3 Troubleshooting Procedures
7.3.1 Overview
Introduction
The troubleshooting procedures for the observable symptoms of failure are presented in the same order as
they appear in Table 7-1. Each procedure includes what to do if you have that particular problem, as well
as instructions for accomplishing the task, or a cross-reference to instructions elsewhere in the manual.
Equipment needed
You will need a voltmeter to troubleshoot the symptoms listed in the tables that follow.
Safety precautions
Exercise appropriate safety precautions when troubleshooting the recorder operation.
!
WARNING—SHOCK HAZARD
TROUBLESHOOTING MAY REQUIRE ACCESS TO HAZARDOUS LIVE
CIRCUITS, AND SHOULD ONLY BE PERFORMED BY QUALIFIED
SERVICE PERSONNEL. MORE THAN ONE SWITCH MAY BE REQUIRED
TO DE-ENERGIZE UNIT BEFORE SERVICING.
164
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
12/03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting and Pen Alignment
of Recorder without Display
7.3.2 Recorder Failure Troubleshooting
Procedure
Table 7-2 explains how to troubleshoot recorder failure symptoms.
Table 7-2 Troubleshooting Recorder Failure Symptoms
Step
1
What to do
How to do it or
where to find the instructions
Check the supply voltage.
Measure the line voltage across the line and neutral
connections at TB1 on the printed circuit assembly
(PCA) on the right (for pen 1).
Check the connections to TB1 on the
pen 1 PCA.
Refer to ac wiring procedures in Section 2 –
Installation.
2
3
Check the system for brown-outs,
heavy load switching, etc.; and
Refer to Section 2 – Installation.
conformance to installation instructions.
Replace the PCA for pen 1.
Refer to the replacement procedures in Section 9 –
4
Replacing Hardware Assemblies.
12/03
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
165
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder
7.3.3 Pen Trace Troubleshooting
Procedure
Table 7-3 explains how to troubleshoot a pen trace problem.
Table 7-3 Troubleshooting Pen Trace Failure Symptoms
Step
1
What to do
How to do it or
where to find the instructions
Check the ink cartridge for proper
installation.
Reposition or replace the ink cartridge as
described in Section 6 – Routine Maintenance.
If the pen arm is severely warped, replace the
pen arm as described in Section 9 – Replacing
Hardware Assemblies.
Check that the chart agrees with the
actuation type and chart set up.
Replace wrong chart with correct chart. Refer to
Section 3 – Configuration, Startup, and Operation
of Recorder without Display for instructions for
viewing the configuration.
2
See Section 6 – Routine Maintenance for
instructions for replacing the chart.
Check the pen alignment.
Follow the procedure in Subsection 7.4.
3
4
Look at printed circuit assembly (PCA) for Press the reset switch SW2. The PCA will be
the pen to see if the red* LED is lit. This
LED is lit when the PCA failed a self-
diagnostic, or an out-of-range input has
been detected. (Flashing green LED is
OK, it indicates that the processor is
active.)
initialized. If the problem was a software error,
the error may be cleared by the reset.
*For Recorders with a display, the red LED is
used by an internal control signal and is not a
fault indicator.
Check the sensor for the proper type and Verify the input configuration data and operation
5
its ability to function.
of the sensor.
Measure input signal at TB2 or apply calibration
source to verify input signal.
Replace the servo plate assembly.
Refer to the replacement procedure in Section 9
– Replacing Hardware Assemblies.
6
7
Replace the printed circuit assembly for
the pen with the problem.
Refer to the replacement procedure in Section 9
– Replacing Hardware Assemblies.
166
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
12/03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting and Pen Alignment
of Recorder without Display
7.3.4 Chart Rotation Troubleshooting
Procedure
Table 7-4 explains how to troubleshoot a chart rotation problem.
Table 7-4 Troubleshooting Chart Rotation Failure Symptoms
Step
1
What to do
How to do it or
where to find the instructions
Check the chart installation.
Turn the chart until the desired time line on the
chart is aligned with the time index on the chart
plate and pen 1 before closing the locking clip on
the hub. Push down on the lifter to return the
pen(s) to the chart.
CAUTION: Do not try to rotate the hub
Check the settings of the configuration
switches. Change settings if incorrect for
application.
Refer to Section 3 – Configuration, Startup, and
Operation of Recorder without Display.
2
3
4
Run the step test.
Refer to Section 3 – Configuration, Startup, and
Operation of Recorder without Display
(Subsection 3.3.3).
Check the motor cable plug connection at Power down the recorder, then visually examine
connector P3 on the printed circuit
assembly for pen 1.
the plug and reseat it.
Replace the chart motor.
Refer to the replacement procedure in Section 9
– Replacing Hardware Assemblies.
5
6
Replace the printed circuit board for pen
1.
Refer to the replacement procedure in Section 9
– Replacing Hardware Assemblies.
12/03
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
167
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder
7.3.5 Troubleshooting Erratic Pen Movement
Procedure
Table 7-5 explains what to do if the pen remains at the high end of range when the input signal is low.
Table 7-5 Troubleshooting Erratic Pen Movement Symptoms
Step
1
What to do
How to do it or
where to find the instructions
Check the sensor and lead wires for
continuity. Check the connections to TB2
on the printed circuit assembly for the pen
with the problem.
Replace the sensor lead wires as needed.
Tighten the connections.
Check the pen and input configuration
data.
Refer to Section 3 – Configuration, Startup, and
Operation of Recorder without Display.
2
3
Run step test.
Refer to Section 3 – Configuration, Startup, and
Operation of Recorder without Display
(Subsection 3.3.3).
Replace the servo plate assembly.
Refer to the replacement procedure in Section 9
– Replacing Hardware Assemblies.
4
5
Replace the printed circuit assembly for
the pen having the problem.
Refer to the replacement procedure in Section 9
– Replacing Hardware Assemblies.
168
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
12/03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting and Pen Alignment
of Recorder without Display
7.4 Alignment of Pen at Zero and 100 %
Procedure
You can align the pens to the zero and 100 % positions on the chart using the procedure in Table 7-6.
If humidity causes the chart to change size, repeat the procedure as needed.
WARNING
SHOCK HAZARD
When the unit is powered a potentially lethal shock hazard exists at the AC line connections at TB1 on
each printed circuit assembly (behing the chart plate). Make sure the unit power is disconnected before
starting the procedure. More than one switch may be required to de-energize the recorder.
Failure to observe this precaution can result in exposure to a potentially lethal shock hazard.
Table 7-6 Procedure for Pen Alignment
Step
1
Action
Graphic
Place run switch SW5 to the setup position (toward the top of
the board) on the pen’s PCA.
See Figure 3-1 for location of SW5 (to
the right of TB1).
Press SW3 and SW4 simultaneously and release them.
See Figure 3-1 for location of SW3 and
SW4.
2
The pen will move downscale toward the hub and be
positioned at the previously set 0 % point on the chart within
approximately 10 seconds.
If the pen tip is greatly out of position, follow Steps 3 through 7. (Unless a pen arm has been replaced, this
probably will not be necessary.) If pen position requires only minor adjustment, go to Step 8.
Turn off the power to the recorder before the pen begins to
move upscale (approximately 10 seconds).
3
To place the pen tips in approximately the correct position,
loosen the screw holding the pen 1 arm to the servo shaft
and move the pen arm to access the locking screw for the
pen 2 arm (if applicable).
4
Align the tip of pen 2 with the zero line on the chart and
tighten the locking screw.
5
6
Align the tip of pen 1 with the zero line on the chart and
tighten the locking screw.
Turn on the power and repeat Step 2.
7
8
To fine-tune the alignment of a pen, press the raise switch
SW4 or lower switch SW3 on its PCA until the pen tip is
aligned with the zero line on the chart.
See Figure 3-1 for the location of SW3
and SW4.
Approximately 10 seconds after the last press of the raise or
lower switch the pen will move to the previously set 100 %
point.
12/03
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
169
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder
Step
Action
Graphic
To fine-tune the alignment of the pen, press the raise switch
SW4 or lower switch SW3 until the pen tip is aligned with the
100 % line on the chart.
See Figure 3-1 for the location of SW3
and SW4.
9
Approximately 10 seconds after the last press of the raise or
lower switch the pen will move downscale as described in
Step 2.
To exit the pen alignment cycle place SW5 to the run position
(toward the bottom of the board). Pen will return to normal
operation.
10
170
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
12/03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting and Pen Alignment
of Recorder with Display
8. Troubleshooting and Pen Alignment
of Recorder with Display
8.1 Overview
Introduction
This section explains how to troubleshoot the recorder models having display and keypad. Troubleshooting
uses self-diagnostic test results and error messages as well as some observable symptoms of failure.
•
To reduce recorder down-time, this section enables tracing trouble to a printed circuit assembly
(PCA)/hardware assembly level rather than to an individual component.
•
While troubleshooting is straightforward, we recommend that only trained service technicians repair
the recorder. SEE THE SHOCK HAZARD WARNING BELOW.
This section also includes instructions for aligning the pens
What’s in this section?
The following is a list of the topics covered in this section.
Topic
See Page
8.1 Overview
8.2 Troubleshooting Aids
8.3 Self Diagnostics
8.4 Observable Symptoms of Failure
8.5 Troubleshooting Procedures
8.6 Alignment of Pen at Zero and Span
!
WARNING—SHOCK HAZARD
TROUBLESHOOTING MAY REQUIRE ACCESS TO HAZARDOUS LIVE
CIRCUITS, AND SHOULD ONLY BE PERFORMED BY QUALIFIED
SERVICE PERSONNEL. MORE THAN ONE SWITCH MAY BE REQUIRED
TO DE-ENERGIZE UNIT BEFORE SERVICING.
12/03
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
171
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder
Types of problems
Instrument performance can be adversely affected by installation and application problems as well as by
hardware problems. We recommend that you investigate the problems in the order listed below, and use the
information in this section to solve them. If replacement of any part is required, follow the procedures in
Section 9 – Replacing Hardware Assemblies.
•
•
•
Installation related problems
Application related problems
Hardware and software related problems
Installation related problems
Read Section 2 – Installation to make sure the recorder has been properly installed. Document 51-52-05-01
How to Apply Digital Instrumentation in Severe Electrical Noise Environments can provide additional
relevant information.
ATTENTION
System noise induced into the recorder will result in diagnostic error messages recurring.
If the diagnostic error messages can be cleared, it indicates a “soft” failure and is probably noise
related.
If system noise is suspected, completely isolate the recorder from all field wiring. Use calibration
sources to simulate PV and check all recorder and control functions; that is, pen functions, chart
trace, output, alarms, etc.
Application related problems
Review the application of the recorder; then, if necessary, direct your questions to the local sales office.
Hardware and software related problems
Use the troubleshooting error messages and observable symptoms to identify typical failures which may
occur in the recorder. Follow the troubleshooting procedures to correct the problems.
172
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
12/03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting and Pen Alignment
of Recorder with Display
8.2 Troubleshooting Aids
Self diagnostics
The software runs self-diagnostic tests to monitor the recorder’s general state. Tests are run when the unit
is powered up and as a background task during operation.
When tests run at power-up, the progress of the tests will be displayed as described in Subsection 8.3.1.
When the tests run in the background during normal operation, the display will not indicate the progress of
the tests. However, if the recorder fails a test, an error message will appear on the lower line of the display
as described in Subsection 8.3.4. Table 8-4 lists all the possible error messages, the reason for each, and
how to correct the problem.
Observable symptoms of failure
Other failures may occur that deal with the power, pen functions, chart rotation, output, or alarms. If erratic
troubleshooting procedure in Subsection 8.5.
Check Installation
If a set of symptoms still persists, refer to Section 2 – Installation and Section 4 – Configuration, Startup,
and Operation of Recorder with Display to ensure that the recorder has been installed and set up properly.
Determine the software version before calling for technical support
Before calling for technical support, follow the procedure in Table 8-1 to determine the version of the
software in the recorder. This version information will assist the support team in diagnosing the problem.
Table 8-1 Procedure for Identifying the Software Version
Step
1
Operation
Press
Action/Result
Select STATUS
Set Up Group
Until you see:
Upper Display
SET
UP
READ
Lower Display
STATUS
Read the software
version
Until you see:
Upper Display
2
FUNC
Software
version
Number
Lower Display
VERSION
Please give this number to the Customer Support
person assisting you.
12/03
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
173
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder
8.3 Self Diagnostics
8.3.1 Power up tests
Tests run automatically
When the recorder is powered-up, self-diagnostics are run by the software.
As the tests in Table 8-2 are run, the display indicates whether the tests were passed or failed as described
below.
Table 8-2 Power-Up Diagnostic Tests
Lower Display
Upper Display
PASS or FAIL
PASS or FAIL
PASS or FAIL
RAMTST
CFGTST (configuration checksum)
CALTST (working calibration)
Status of tests displayed
As the tests are run, the lower line of the display shows which test is running. The upper line of the display
indicates the status. If any of these tests fail, “FAIL” appears momentarily in the upper display, then a
display test is run. The display changes to show the value of the process variable on the top line, and the
error message for the failed test on the second line.
In addition, if the control group parameter “CONTRL” has a value of “ENAB” when the test is failed, the
message “FAILSF” (failsafe) will alternate with error message for the test, and the controller will be in
manual mode. When the “FAILSF” message is displayed, it indicates that the recorder control output has
been driven to the value assigned to the control group “FAILSF” parameter.
By default, when the recorder is powered up the display will be for pen 1. Therefore, when the power up
tests run, the “PASS” and “FAIL” messages will apply only to the printed circuit assembly associated with
pen 1. However, in a 2-pen recorder the tests will also be run on the printed circuit assembly for pen 2. If
the pen 2 assembly fails one of the tests, the message “P2 ERR” will be displayed, along with any error
messages from the pen 1 tests.
174
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
12/03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting and Pen Alignment
of Recorder with Display
8.3.2 View Status of Tests
Procedure
The status of self-diagnostic tests can be viewed using the procedure in Table 8-3.
Note that “FAILSF” is not a test. When “FAILSF YES” is displayed, it is an indication that the recorder is
using the value of the control set up group “FAILSF” parameter as the output value because the recorder
failed a self-test, or because the recorder detected an input failure while the input set up parameter
“BRNOUT” = “NONE”.
See Table 8-4 for more information about self-diagnostics, and for recommended actions when a test fails.
Table 8-3 Procedure for Displaying the Results of Self-Diagnostics
Step
1
Operation
Press
Action/Result
Select STATUS
set up Group
Until you see:
Upper Display
SET
UP
READ
Lower Display
STATUS
Read the status tests
results
Until you see:
Upper Display
2
FUNC
NO or YES
YESindicates
a failure
Lower Display
FAILSF
• Successive presses of the FUNC key will display
the results of the status tests (PASS or FAIL) in the
following order:
RAMTST
CFGTST
CALTST
• Identify the problem and correct the failure as shown
12/03
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
175
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder
8.3.3 Background Tests
Tests run automatically
During normal operation of the recorder, tests of the configuration and calibration run in the background. If
the recorder fails one of the tests, the appropriate message will be displayed as described in Subsection
8.3.4 Error Messages
All relevant messages are displayed
If the recorder fails one or more tests, the operator is alerted by the display of one or more messages.∗ One
message is displayed at a time on the lower line of the display.
If the problem is with the pen channel input or printed circuit assembly for which real time values are
currently on display, the appropriate error message for each failed test will be displayed. The display will
continue to cycle through the messages until the test is passed.
If the failure is for the pen channel not on display, then a message will alert the operator to the existence of
one or more error messages for the other pen. The message is “Pn ERR”, where n is the number of the pen
with errors not on display. Once the operator has toggled the display to the pen channel whose input or
printed circuit assembly was the source of the error, the display will cycle through the appropriate error
messages.
Error messages are listed in Table 8-4, along with the type of test to which each applies, the reason for the
failure, and how to correct the problem.
ATTENTION
In addition to error messages, the recorder will display special status messages when optional features
are active.
• If the lower display flashes “TUNING”, the recorder is in the process of automatically determining
tuning parameters using the Accutune II feature described in Appendix D.
• If the lower display flashes “RUN n” or “HOLD”, the recorder is executing setpoint program “n” as
described in Appendix C, and the run or hold action was initiated locally.
• If the lower display flashes “run n” or “hold”, the recorder is executing setpoint program “n”, and
the run or hold action was initiated remotely.
If you are familiar with the operation of the recorder models without display, you are aware that in those models the
red LED on the printed circuit assembly lights when the unit fails a self-diagnostic, or detects an out-of-range input.
The red LED has a different function in the models with display and keypad. It is not an indication of a
problem. In the models with display the red LED indicates that the display is currently interfacing with this PCA.
Rely on the error messages to notify you of a problem with a recorder with a display. (The flashing green LED is an
indication that the processor is active.)
176
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
12/03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting and Pen Alignment
of Recorder with Display
Table 8-4 Error Messages
Reason For Failure
Lower Display
Indication
Type of Test
How to Correct the Problem
power-up
The working calibration constants 1. Use the procedure in Subsection 4.5.2.5
CALERR
background
in the recorder are in error or
corrupted in memory.
to switch between the set of calibration
constants being used (factory or field) to
the other type. Exit configuration mode.
Next go back into configuration mode and
change back to the original type of
constants used (factory or field). This will
overwrite the corrupted values in memory.
2. Change the setting of the “IN TYP”
parameter and exit configuration mode.
Go back into configuration mode and
change the “IN TYP” setting back to the
correct type.
power-up
background
Configuration data is in error.
1. Check all configuration parameter values
for accuracy. (See Section 4 –
CFGERR
Configuration, Startup, and Operation of
Recorder with Display.)
2. Make a change to configuration, then exit
configuration, so the recorder will
recalculate the checksum error.
background
Unable to write to nonvolatile
memory. Anytime you change a
parameter and it is not accepted,
you will see EE FAIL.
1. Try to change something in configuration.
2. Cycle the power.
EEFAIL
FAILSF
3. If problem persists, replace printed circuit
assembly for the channel.
power-up
background
This error message is displayed
whenever the recorder is using
the value of the control group
“FAILSF” parameter as an output.
For this to occur, the recorder
must have control enabled
(control group parameter
“CONTRL” = “ENAB”) when one
or more of the following occur:
• RAM test fails
1. Check the operation of the input sensor.
2. Run through STATUS check to
determine the reason for the failure.
• Press the SET UP key until
STATUS appears in the lower display.
• Press the FUNC key to see what
tests pass or fail, then run through the
STATUS codes a second time to see
if the error cleared.
• Configuration test fails
• Calibration test fails
• Input parameter
“BRNOUT” = “NONE” and the
input fails.
• Correct according to the
recommendations given in this table.
12/03
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
177
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder
Lower Display
Indication
Type of Test
Reason For Failure
How to Correct the Problem
background
Recorder detects an input failure. 1. Be sure the range and actuation are
INP FL
Two consecutive failures of input
1 integration (for example,
recorder cannot make analog to
digital conversion.)
configured correctly.
2. Check the input source.
3. See input set up group in Section 4 –
Configuration, Startup, and Operation of
Recorder with Display and change the “IN
TYP” or “LD CAL” to a different type.
Enter it, loop through the status tests,
then return the input type to the original
one.
4. Recalibrate if step 3 does not clear the
error. Refer to Section 5 – Input and
Output Calibration for Recorder with
Display.
5. Replace the printed circuit assembly for
the pen.
background
Input out of range. The process
input is outside the range limits.
1. Make sure the range and actuation are
configured properly.
INPRNG
2. Check the input source.
3. See Section 4 – Configuration, Startup,
and Operation of Recorder with Display to
restore the factory or field calibration, as
applicable.
4. Field calibrate using the procedure in
Section 5 – Input and Output Calibration
for Recorders with Display.
5. Replace the printed circuit assembly for
the pen.
power-up
background
Indicates that one or more error
messages are active for the pen
channel for which values are not
on display.
P1 ERR
P2 ERR
1. Press the FUNC key to toggle to the
other pen channel.
2. Watch the display to see all error
messages for the active channel.
For example, if value of INP1 is
on display, while the input for pen
2 fails, P2 ERR will be displayed.
This alerts the operator to the
need to switch the display to pen
2 to view the active error
3. Follow the procedure in this table for
each message displayed.
messages associated with that
channel’s input and printed circuit
assembly.
power-up
RAM failure
1. Cycle power or press the reset switch
SW2 to see if the error clears.
RAMTST
2. If error does not clear, replace the printed
circuit assembly for the pen.
178
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
12/03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting and Pen Alignment
of Recorder with Display
8.4 Observable Symptoms of Failure
Introduction
In addition to the error message prompts, there are observable symptoms of failure that can be identified by
noting the erratic recorder functions.
Symptoms
Compare your recorder’s symptoms with those shown in Table 8-5 and refer to the indicated subsection for
the appropriate troubleshooting procedure.
Table 8-5 Observable Symptoms of Failure
See
Symptom
Subsection
Recorder will not operate.
Recorder operation is normal but pen trace is incorrect.
Chart rotates at wrong speed or will not rotate (pen indication correct).
Pen remains at high end of range when input signal is low.
A key does not respond and/or a display does not light.
Displayed output does not agree with controller output.
External alarm function does not operate properly.
Digital input function does not operate properly.
Modbus communications are not successful.
12/03
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
179
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder
8.5 Troubleshooting Procedures
8.5.1 Overview
Introduction
The troubleshooting procedures for the observable symptoms of failure are presented in the same order as
they appear in Table 8-5. Each procedure includes what to do if you have that particular failure, as well as
instructions for accomplishing the task, or a cross-reference to instructions elsewhere in the manual.
Equipment needed
You will need the following equipment in order to troubleshoot the symptoms listed in the tables that
follow:
•
•
•
DC Milliammeter – mA DC
Calibration sources – T/c, mV, Volt, etc.
Voltmeter
Safety precautions
Exercise appropriate safety precautions when troubleshooting the recorder operation.
!
WARNING—SHOCK HAZARD
TROUBLESHOOTING MAY REQUIRE ACCESS TO HAZARDOUS LIVE
CIRCUITS, AND SHOULD ONLY BE PERFORMED BY QUALIFIED
SERVICE PERSONNEL. MORE THAN ONE SWITCH MAY BE REQUIRED
TO DE-ENERGIZE UNIT BEFORE SERVICING.
180
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
12/03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting and Pen Alignment
of Recorder with Display
8.5.2 Recorder Failure Troubleshooting
Procedure
Table 8-6 explains how to troubleshoot recorder failure symptoms.
Table 8-6 Troubleshooting Recorder Failure Symptoms
Step
1
What to do
How to do it or
where to find the instructions
Check the supply voltage.
Measure the line voltage across the line and
neutral connections at TB1 on the printed circuit
assembly (PCA) on the right (for pen 1).
Check the connections to TB1 on the pen Refer to ac wiring procedures in Section 2 –
2
3
1 PCA.
Installation.
Check the system for brown-outs, heavy
load switching, etc.; and conformance to
installation instructions.
Refer to Section 2 – Installation.
Replace the PCA for pen 1.
Refer to the replacement procedures in Section 9
4
– Replacing Hardware Assemblies.
12/03
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
181
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder
8.5.3 Pen Trace Troubleshooting
Procedure
Table 8-7 explains how to troubleshoot a problem with the pen trace not matching the (correct) displayed
value, assuming that the pen channel is configured to trace the input value.
Table 8-7 Troubleshooting Pen Trace Failure Symptoms
Step
1
What to do
How to do it or
where to find the instructions
Check the ink cartridge for proper
installation.
Reposition or replace the ink cartridge as
described in Section 6 – Routine Maintenance.
If the pen arm is severely warped, replace the
pen arm as described in Section 9 – Replacing
Hardware Assemblies.
Check that the chart agrees with the
actuation type and check chart and pen
set up.
Replace wrong chart with correct chart. Refer to
Section 4 – Configuration, Startup, and Operation
of Recorder with Display for instructions for
viewing the configuration.
2
See Section 6 – Routine Maintenance for
instructions for replacing the chart.
Check the pen alignment
Follow the procedure in Subsection 8.6.
3
4
Check the sensor for the proper type and Verify the input configuration data and operation
its ability to function.
of the sensor.
Measure input signal at TB2 or apply calibration
source to verify input signal.
Replace the servo plate assembly.
Refer to the replacement procedure in Section 9
– Replacing Hardware Assemblies.
5
6
Replace the printed circuit assembly for
the pen with the problem.
Refer to the replacement procedure in Section 9
– Replacing Hardware Assemblies.
182
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
12/03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting and Pen Alignment
of Recorder with Display
8.5.4 Chart Rotation Troubleshooting
Procedure
Table 8-8 explains how to troubleshoot a chart rotation problem.
Table 8-8 Troubleshooting Chart Rotation Failure Symptoms
Step
1
What to do
How to do it or
where to find the instructions
Check the chart installation.
Turn the chart until the desired time line on the
chart is aligned with the time index on the chart
plate and pen 1 before closing the locking clip on
the hub. Push down on the lifter to return the
pen(s) to the chart.
CAUTION: Do not try to rotate the hub
Check the configured chart speed value
and change it, if required.
Refer to Section 4 – Configuration, Startup, and
Operation of Recorder with Display.
2
3
Run the step test.
Refer to Section 4 – Configuration, Startup, and
Operation of Recorder with Display (Subsection
4.4.3).
Check the motor cable plug connection at Power down the recorder, then visually examine
4
connector P3 on the printed circuit
assembly for pen 1.
the plug and re-seat it.
Replace the chart motor.
Refer to the replacement procedure in Section 9
– Replacing Hardware Assemblies.
5
6
Replace the printed circuit board for pen
1.
Refer to the replacement procedure in Section 9
– Replacing Hardware Assemblies.
12/03
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
183
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder
8.5.5 Troubleshooting Erratic Pen Movement
Procedure
Table 8-9 explains what to do if the pen remains at the high end of range when the input signal is low.
Table 8-9 Troubleshooting Erratic Pen Movement Symptoms
Step
1
What to do
How to do it or
where to find the instructions
Check the sensor and lead wires for
continuity. Check the connections to TB2
on the printed circuit assembly for the pen
with the problem.
Replace the sensor lead wires as needed.
Tighten the connections.
Check the pen and input configuration
data.
Refer to Section 4 – Configuration, Startup, and
Operation of Recorder with Display.
2
3
Run step test.
Refer to Section 4 – Configuration, Startup, and
Operation of Recorder with Display (Subsection
4.4.3).
Replace the servo plate assembly.
Refer to the replacement procedure in Section 9
– Replacing Hardware Assemblies.
4
5
Replace the printed circuit assembly for
the pen having the problem.
Refer to the replacement procedure in Section 9
– Replacing Hardware Assemblies.
8.5.6 Troubleshooting the Keypad and Display
Procedure
Table 8-10 explains what to do if a key does not respond and/or the display does not light.
Table 8-10 Troubleshooting Keypad and/or Display Failure Symptoms
Step
1
What to do
How to do it or
where to find the instructions
Run a Key Test to check the operation of
the keys and displays.
Refer to Section 4 – Configuration, Startup, and
Operation of Recorder with Display for procedure
for running key test (Subsection 4.4.4.4).
Verify correct alignment of display cable
with pins on connector at display module
and main PCA.
Insure tracks on cable are aligned with pins on
connector.
2
3
Replace the display and keypad assembly Refer to the replacement procedure in Section 9
or display cables, as required. – Replacing Hardware Assemblies.
184
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
12/03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting and Pen Alignment
of Recorder with Display
8.5.7 Troubleshooting Relay Output
Procedure
Table 8-11 explains what to do if the displayed output does not agree with the single relay or dual relay
control output.
Table 8-11 Troubleshooting Relay Output Failure Symptoms
Step
What to do
How to do it or
where to find the instructions
Be sure the recorder is configured for
relay output.
Refer to Section 4 – Configuration, Startup, and
Operation of Recorder with Display.
1
2
3
Be sure all the recorder and control
related data is correct.
Refer to Section 4 – Configuration, Startup, and
Operation of Recorder with Display.
Check that the applicable output relay
actuates properly. If it does, go to step 4.
Put the recorder into manual mode and adjust
the output manually to raise or lower the PV
around the setpoint. Listen for the click of the
relay as the PV moves in either direction.
Observe OUT 1 or OUT 2 value on the front
display.
Check the field wiring.
Replace the relay.
Refer to Section 2 – Installation.
4
5
Refer to Section 9 – Replacing Hardware
Assemblies.
Replace the printed circuit assembly for
the pen channel having the problem.
Refer to the replacement procedure in Section 9
– Replacing Hardware Assemblies.
6
12/03
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
185
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder
8.5.8 Troubleshooting External Alarm Function
Procedure
Table 8-12 explains what to do if the external alarm function does not operate properly.
Table 8-12 Troubleshooting External Alarm Function Failure Symptoms
Step
1
What to do
How to do it or
where to find the instructions
Be sure all the alarm configuration data is Refer to Section 4 – Configuration, Startup, and
correct.
Operation of Recorder with Display.
Refer to Section 2 – Installation.
Alarms can be triggered either by:
Check the field wiring.
2
3
Check that the applicable alarm relay
actuates properly depending on ALARM
TYPE configuration selection.
• reconfiguring the value of the trip points
(AnSnVA), [n = 1 or 2], or
• connecting a signal generator to the input and
setting the generator level beyond the trip-
point values.
8.5.9 Troubleshooting Remote Switch (Digital Input) Function
Procedure
Table 8-13 explains what to do if the digital input function does not operate properly.
Table 8-13 Troubleshooting Remote Switch (Digital Input) Function Failure Symptoms
Step
What to do
How to do it or
where to find the instructions
Be sure all remote switch configuration
data is correct.
Refer to Section 4 – Configuration, Startup, and
Operation of Recorder with Display.
1
See section for pen parameters set up group or
remote switch set up group.
Check the field wiring.
Refer to Section 2 – Installation.
2
3
Check that the applicable remote switch
actuates properly depending on REMOTE
SWITCH configuration selection.
Remote switch actuates either by:
• reconfiguring PENIN for REM1 or REM2, or
• reconfiguring REM SW for SP2, MAN, or
MNFS on REMSW1 or REMSW2.
186
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
12/03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting and Pen Alignment
of Recorder with Display
8.5.10 Troubleshooting Modbus Communications
Procedure
Table 8-14 explains what to do if Modbus communications are not successful.
Table 8-14 Troubleshooting Modbus Communications
Step
What to do
How to do it or
where to find the instructions
Verify that communications are enabled.
Refer to Section 4 - Configuration, Startup, and
Operation of Recorder with Display.
1
2
3
Check that the configured baud rate is
correct.
Refer to Section 4 - Configuration, Startup, and
Operation of Recorder with Display.
Check that the device address is correct.
Refer to Section 4 - Configuration, Startup, and
Each address must be unique. A recorder Operation of Recorder with Display.
with two pens must have a unique
address for each pen channel.
Check that the communication wires are
properly connected to the J3 connector on
the communication printed circuir
assembly (PCA).
Refer to Section 2 - Installation.
4
5
Verify that the communcation cable
connects J2 on the communication PCA
to J3 on the PCA for Pen 1. The PCA for
Pen 1 is on the right when facing the
recorder.
Refer to Section 9 - Replacing Hardware
Assemblies.
If communication is used for Pen 2,
another communication cable must
connect J1 on the communication PCA
with J3 on the PCA for Pen 2.
Replace the communication PCA.
Refer to the replacement pocedure in Section 9 -
6
Replacing Hardware Assemblies.
12/03
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
187
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder
8.6 Alignment of Pen at Zero and Span
Introduction
If the pen trace does not track at the correct chart increment with a known input value, you can use the
following procedure to adjust the pen travel at zero and span (full scale) to compensate for the effects of
humidity on the chart size.
If the recorder has 2 pens, be sure Input1 (INP 1) is on the display. If it is not on display, press FUNC
key to toggle input for display.
Procedure
Table 8-15 Procedure for Aligning Pen at Zero and Span
Step
1
Press
Action/Result
until you can see:
SET
Upper Display
ALIN
UP
Lower Display
PEN
until you can see:
2
FUNC
Upper Display
(value)
(approximately 60 on the upper display)
Lower Display
PEN0
Wait until pen stops moving downscale.
If the pen tip is greatly out of position, follow Steps 3 through 7. (Unless a pen arm has been
replaced, this probably will not be necessary.) If pen position requires only minor adjustment, go to
Step 8.
Turn off the power to the recorder.
3
4
To place the pen tips in approximately the correct position, loosen the screw
holding the pen 1 (purple) arm to the servo shaft and move the pen arm to
access the locking screw for the pen 2 (red) arm (if applicable).
Align the tip of pen 2 with the zero line on the chart and tighten the locking
screw.
5
6
7
Align the tip of pen 1 with the zero line on the chart and tighten the locking
screw.
Turn on the power and repeat Step 2.
188
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
12/03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting and Pen Alignment
of Recorder with Display
Step
8
Press
Action/Result
To set tip of pen 1 (purple) on zero scale line of chart ± 0.25 % (or quarter
graduation).
or
and you will see:
Upper Display
9
FUNC
(value)
(approximately 1200 more than the zero value in Step 2)
Lower Display
PEN 100
Wait until pen stops moving upscale.
To set tip of pen 1 (purple) on full scale line of chart ± 0.25 % (or quarter
graduation).
10
or
to return to normal operation for pen 1.
you will see:
11
DISP
Upper Display
(value)
Lower Display
INP
and the Input 1 indicator will be lit.
If the recorder has 2 pens go to Step 12.
you will see:
12
FUNC
Upper Display
(value)
Lower Display
INP
and the Input 2 indicator will be lit.
Repeat Steps 1, 2, and 8 through 11 for pen 2 (red).
12/03
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
189
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder
190
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
12/03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parts List
9. Parts List
9.1 Overview
Introduction
This section provides the replacement parts lists for the DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder.
Most parts are supplied on an optimum replacement unit basis; that is, part numbers are given for complete
printed circuit assemblies rather than for individual PCA components.
The figures that follow are exploded views of the DR4300 recorder. Each part is labeled with a key number
and the key numbers are listed in tables with associated part numbers.
When ordering parts, be sure to specify your recorder’s serial and model numbers (on chartplate) as well as
the part number.
Also included for your reference are an Internal Cabling drawing (Figure 9-4) and an Internal Wiring
What’s in this section?
The following is a list of the topics covered in this section.
Topic
See Page
9.1 Overview
9.2 Exploded Views
Figure 9-1
Figure 9-2
Figure 9-3
Door Assembly
Chart Plate
Recorder Components
9.2 Internal Cabling
Figure 9-4
Figure 9-5
Internal Cabling CE Mark Version
Internal Cabling Non-CE Mark Version
12/03
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
191
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder
9.2 Exploded Views
Door assembly
Figure 9-1 is an exploded view of the door assembly. Table 9-1 is a list of the associated part numbers.
1-1
1-2
1
1-3
1-2
1-1
24187
Figure 9-1 Door Assembly
Table 9-1 Door Assembly Parts
Description
Recommended Quantity
Spare Parts Per per Unit
Key
1
Part Number
10
100
1
Door Assembly (includes components for all door
variations)
51309609-501
51309609-502
51309609-506
51404778-501
Gray Door
Blue Door
Black Door
NEMA4/Heavy Duty Door
(K)30756409-002
(K)30756409-002
Hinge Pin*
2
2
1
1-1
1-2
1-3
Retaining Ring*
51309609-503
51404673-501
30757307-503
Latch/Lock Assembly Kit*
NEMA4/Heavy Duty Door Latch/Lock Assembly Kit*
Key Only for Lock Assembly*
1
3
51198139-501
51309609-504
Graphic Overlay for Door* (not shown)
1
1
External Keypad Assembly Replacement Kit* (not
shown)
*Parts included with applicable door assembly.
(K) denotes that the part number is for the parts kit in which the described part is included. The described
part cannot be ordered separately.
192
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
12/03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parts List
Chart plate
Figure 9-2 is an exploded view of the chart plate assembly. Table 9-2 is a list of the associated part
numbers.
3
4
7
8
5
1
2
24215
6
Figure 9-2 Chart Plate Assembly
Table 9-2 Chart Plate Assembly Parts
Recommended
Spare Parts Per
Quantity
per Unit
Key
Part Number
Description
10
1
100
5
(K)30756409-002
(K)30756409-002
30735489-007
30735489-002
30756113-501
No. 1 Pen Arm
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
No. 2 Pen Arm (2-pen model only)
No. 1 Purple Pen Cartridge (six pack)
No. 2 Red Pen Cartridge (six pack)
Chart Motor
1
5
1
3
1
3
1
3
Servo Plate Assembly
1-pen model
30755833-501
30755833-502
2-pen model
(K)30756150-501
(K)30756409-002
Chart Hub Kit
1
1
7
8
Pen Lifter Retainer
(K) denotes that the part number is for the parts kit in which the described part is included. The described part
cannot be ordered separately.
12/03
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
193
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parts List
Table 9-3 Basic Recorder Parts
Description
Recommended Quantity
Spare Parts Per per Unit
Key
1
Part Number
10
100
100 Vac to 240 Vac models
51404453-501
51404453-502
Printed Circuit Assembly, Record Only
1
3
1/2
Printed Circuit Assembly, Record and Control Spare Kit
(includes solid state relay and open collector output)
Printed Circuit Assembly, FM-approved Limit Controller
(includes solid state relay and open collector output)
51404453-505
2
3
4
5
30755800-502
51404511-501
51404566-501
51404750-502
Case
1
1
1
1
3
3
3
3
1
Cable Replacement Kit
Digital Input Assembly
Modbus Communication Assembly
1
1/2
1/2
Parts Not Shown
51404459-501
Display Module Printed Circuit Assembly
Hand Held Display Kit
1
3
1/2
51404999-001
51197612-502
51197612-508
51198150-501
30755306-501
30756725-501
30756679-501
51204403-501
51404753-501
51404546-501
30755065-001
30755065-502
51197657-501
51205804-501
Round cable suppression cores, package of 2
Round cable suppression cores, package of 8
Pipe Mounting Kit, 2 inch size
Relay Kit - Electromechanical
Relay Kit - Solid State
1
1
3
1
up to 3
1
1
1
1
10
10
10
2
2
2
Relay Kit - Open Collector
Transmitter 24 V Power Supply Assembly
Filter assembly, CE version
Battery for Totalizer Option
Standard Mounting Bracket Kit
Heavy Duty/NEMA4 Mounting Bracket Kit
Panel Mount Gasket Kit
Terminal Block Kit
Upgrade PROMs
51197993-501
51450899-501
51450899-502
51450899-503
Basic Recorder PROM, latest software version
Totalizer Upgrade PROM and Battery
PID Control Upgrade PROM
Auxilary Output/Timer Upgrade PROM
12/03
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
195
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder
12 conductor flat flexible cable- 51309650-002
Display /
Keyboard
Pen 1
Pen 2
Chart
Plate
12 conductor flat flexible cable-
51309650-001
Chassis Ground for RS485/422
Communication Card-
51404880-001
Pen 2 Motor
Ground cable- 30755062-008
Chart Motor
4 conductor pen motor cable
4 conductor pen motor cable
Pen 1 Motor
4 conductor chart motor cable
24V Power Supply Cable- 51404588-001
24V
Transmitter
Power Supply
5 conductor cable-
51404677-001
AC
In
Battery
J4
J2
J1
RS485/422
Communication Card
Battery
P1 P2 P3
J1
J3
J4
P1 P2 P3
J1
J3
J4
J10
J10
Digital Input Cable-
51404586-001
Digital Input Cable-
51404586-001
TB1
TB1
Pen 2
Mainboard
Pen 1
Mainboard
J13
Shield
Wire
J13
Digital Input Power
Cable- 51404585-001
Digital Input Power
Cable- 51404585-001
P7
P7
Digital Input
Digital Input
J9
J9
Digital Input Ground Cable
Digital Input Ground Cable
Ground cable- 30755062-006
Ground cable- 30755062-006
Power cable-
51309731-001
Ground
Lug
CE Mark Filter
Assembly-
51404753-001
AC Supply
Voltage
Figure 9-4 DR4300 Recorder (CE Mark) – Internal Cabling Diagram
196
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
12/03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parts List
12 conductor flat flexible cable- 51309650-002
Display /
Keyboard
Pen 1
Pen 2
Chart
Plate
12 conductor flat flexible cable-
51309650-001
Chassis Ground for RS485/422
Communication Card-
51404880-001
Pen 2 Motor
Ground cable- 30755062-009
Chart Motor
4 conductor pen motor cable
4 conductor pen motor cable
Pen 1 Motor
4 conductor chart motor cable
24V Power Supply Cable- 51404588-001
24V
Transmitter
Power Supply
5 conductor cable-
51404677-001
AC
In
Battery
J4
J2
J1
RS485/422
Communication Card
Battery
P1 P2 P3
J1
J3
J4
P1 P2 P3
J1
J3
J4
J10
J10
Digital Input Cable-
51404586-001
Digital Input Cable-
51404586-001
TB1
TB1
2 Pen power
cable assembly
51309731-002
Pen 2
Mainboard
Pen 1
Mainboard
Shield
Wire
J13
J13
Digital Input Power
Cable- 51404585-001
Digital Input Power
Cable- 51404585-001
P7
P7
Digital Input
Digital Input
J9
J9
Digital Input Ground Cable
Digital Input Ground Cable
Ground cable- 30755062-006
TB6
Ground cable- 30755062-006
Ground
Lug
NOTE: For 1 pen units, the 51404588-002 cable
assembly is used. For 2 pen units, the 51309731-002
cable assembly is used.
AC Supply Voltage
connector
Figure 9-5 DR4300 Recorder (Non-CE Mark) – Internal Cabling Diagram
12/03
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
197
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder
198
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
12/03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix A - Accuracy
A.Accuracy
A.1 Overview
Reference accuracy
The reference accuracy varies according to the type of input actuation.
•
•
Typical reference accuracy for each type of input is supplied in Subsection A.2.
Factory accuracy may be improved by performing an input calibration (field calibration) as described
in Section 5 (Field calibration requires model with display). The field-calibrated reference accuracy
junction calibration of ± 0.01 degrees using the standard “ice bath” method of calibration.
12/03
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Model Product Manual
199
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder
A.2 Typical Reference Accuracy
Table A-1 Typical Reference Accuracy
Types of Input
Actuations
Range
Reference
Accuracy*
with
Factory
Accuracy*
Temp Stability
± Degrees
Error Per 1 Degree
∆T
Field
Calibration
°F
°C
± °F
± °C
± °F
± °C
Thermocouples
B
105 to 3300
150 to 500
41 to 1816
66 to 260
28.0
6.0
3.0
16.0
3.3
1.7
4.00
1.00
0.40
37
18
21
10
500 to 1000
1000 to 3300
260 to 538
538 to 1815
E
–454 to 1832
–454 to –202
–202 to 1832
–270 to 1000
–270 to –130
–130 to 1000
36.0
2.0
20.0
1.1
79
14
44
8
1.40
0.70
E (low)
J
1.0
1.6
0.8
2.4
1.0
0.6
0.9
0.5
1.4
0.6
11
7
6
4
3
5
4
0.40
0.15
0.08
0.15
0.10
–200 to 1100
0 to 1600
–129 to 593
–18 to 871
–7 to 410
J (low)
K
6
20 to 770
9
–320 to 2500
–20 to 1000`
–196 to 1371
–29 to 538
K (low)
Ni-Ni Moly
7
32 to 2500
32 to 500
500 to 2500
0 to 1317
0 to 260
260 to 1371
1.5
1.0
0.8
0.6
12
9
7
5
0.21
0.14
Nicrosil-Nisil
R
2.1
1.2
11
6
0.20
0 to 2372
–18 to 1200
0 to 3100
0 to 500
500 to 3100
–18 to 1704
–18 to 260
260 to 1704
4.0
2.0
2.2
1.1
26
13
14
7
0.50
0.21
S
0 to 3100
0 to 500
500 to 3100
–18 to 1704
–18 to 260
260 to 1704
4.0
2.0
2.2
1.1
23
13
13
7
0.50
0.21
T
1.6
0.8
0.9
0.5
13
7
7
4
0.15
0.15
–420 to 700
–200 to 600
–251 to 371
–129 to 316
T (low)
W5W26
0 to 4200
0 to 600
600 to 3600
3600 to 4200
–18 to 2316
–18 to 316
316 to 1982
1982 to 2316
2.8
2.6
3.2
1.6
1.5
1.8
19
13
27
11
7
15
1.00
0.50
0.20
RTD
Platinum
–300 to 900
–130 to 392
–238 to 482
–184 to 482
–90 to 200
–150 to 250
0.8
0.6
0.6
0.5
0.3
0.3
4
3
3
2
2
2
0.15
0.15
0.15
100 ohms**
100 ohms (low)**
100 ohms (T)***
*Includes reference junction calibration of ± 0.01 degrees using the standard "ice bath" method of calibration. Factory accuracy at
reference ± 1.2 °F. Note that factory accuracy may have typical variations of ± 150 microvolts or ± 0.6 ohms for RTDs which
means field calibration may be required to achieve stated accuracy.
**IEC Alpha = 0.00385
***Alpha = 0.00391
200
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
12/03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix A - Accuracy
Types of Input
Actuations
Range
Reference
Accuracy*
with
Field
Calibration
Factory
Accuracy*
Temp Stability
± Degrees
Error Per 1 Degree
∆T
Linear
0 to 20
4 to 20
16 µA
16 µA
80 µA
80 µA
0.011 %/°F
0.011 %/°F
Milliamperes dc
Millivolts dc
0 to 10
0 to 100
0 to 200
10 µV
100 µV
200 µV
50 µA
500 µA
1.0 mV
0.011 %/°F
0.011 %/°F
0.011 %/°F
Volts dc
0 to 1
0 to 2
0 to 5
1 to 5
0 to 10
2 to 10
1 mV
2 mV
5 mV
4 mV
10 mV
8 mV
5 mV
10 mV
25 mV
20 mV
50 mV
80 mV
0.011 %/°F
0.011 %/°F
0.011 %/°F
0.011 %/°F
0.011 %/°F
0.011 %/°F
*Includes reference junction calibration of ± 0.01 degrees using the standard "ice bath" method of calibration. Factory accuracy at
reference ± 1.2 °F. Note that factory accuracy may have typical variations of ± 150 microvolts or ± 0.6 ohms for RTDs which
means field calibration may be required to achieve stated accuracy.
**IEC Alpha = 0.00385
***Alpha = 0.00391
12/03
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Model Product Manual
201
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder
202
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
12/03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B - Available 10-inch Charts
B.Available 10-inch Charts
B.1 Single Range Charts
Table B-1 lists the chart part numbers for the available 10-inch single range charts.
+ indicates the chart is used in Table 3-2 configurations; no mark indicates recorder with display is
required.
Table B-1 10-inch Single Range Chart Part Numbers
Chart Type
Range
Units
24 HR
7 DAY
P/N 24001660-XXX
P/N 24001661-XXX
0 to 1800
C
C
C
F
C
F
C
F
C
F
C
F
F
F
F
F
F
C
C
F
F
C
F
F
135
028
027
019
B Thermocouple
J Thermocouple
–18 to 425
–45 to +150
–50 to +300
0 to 150
028
027
019
070
114
024
002
062
012
063
013
003
014
015
004
018
057
030
029
056
094
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
070
+
0 to 200
0 to 250
024
002
062
006
063
007
008
009
010
011
018
057
030
029
056
+
+
0 to 300
0 to 300
0 to 400
0 to 400
0 to 500
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
0 to 600
0 to 800
+
+
+
+
+
0 to 1000
0 to 1200
0 to 1600
10 to 340
10 to 76
50 to 1400
50 to 650
100 to 260
150 to 750
810 to 910
150
230
12/03
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
203
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder
Chart Type
Range
Units
24 HR
7 DAY
P/N 24001660-XXX
P/N 24001661-XXX
–18 to 1320
C
C
F
031
031
K Thermocouple
0 to 200
0 to 400
0 to 400
0 to 500
0 to 600
0 to 800
0 to 1000
0 to 1000
0 to 1200
0 to 1200
0 to 1600
0 to 2000
0 to 2400
086
053
064
205
059
060
007
049
006
065
016
005
009
227
017
025
032
089
066
147
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
053
064
C
C
C
C
F
059
060
016
049
012
+
+
+
C
F
C
F
013
014
015
+
+
+
F
F
800 to 1000
0 to 1600
F
C
F
+
+
+
017
025
032
R Thermocouple
0 to 2500
+
+
30 to 2900
800 to 1600
0 to 1600
F
C
C
F
S Thermocouple
T Thermocouple
0 to 3000
+
+
+
147
042
033
069
034
100
+
+
+
+
+
–250 to +150
–130 to +410
–100 to +100
–90 to +210
0 to 100
F
F
033
069
034
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
+
+
0 to 150
103
0 to 300
079
058
+75 to –200
+125 to –105
0 to 1800
+
098
157
+
W5W26 Thermocouple
204
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
12/03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B - Available 10-inch Charts
Chart Type
Range
Units
24 HR
7 DAY
P/N 24001660-XXX
P/N 24001661-XXX
–200 to +200
199
Linear
–100 to +200
–100 to +100
–85 to +190
–75 to +260
–60 to +215
–50 to +50
–40 to +10
–35 to +75
–30 to +100
–30 to +20
–18 to 94
–10 to 100
–5 to 50
0 to .6
232
201
179
178
088
+
+
+
178
179
+
F
218
142
023
+
+
C
C
F
023
210
204
035
+
+
149
C
022
211
175
197/022
203
+
0 to 1
202
0 to 2
MG/L
MGD
217
0 to 2
129
0 to 5
074
0 to 8
212
076
036
119
071
0 to 10
076
036
085
071
196
095
040
041
0 to 14
0 to 15
0 to 20
0 to 24
FEET
0 to 25
095
040
110
078
0 to 30
0 to 40
0 to 45
0 to 50
+
051
075
001
+
+
+
0 to 55
130
0 to 70
0 to 80
120
001
180
0 to 100
0 to 150
+
+
Linear (continued)
12/03
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
205
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder
Chart Type
Range
Units
24 HR
7 DAY
P/N 24001660-XXX
P/N 24001661-XXX
0 to 200
010
050
037
011
104
052
223
137
173
054
+
+
+
+
004
050
037
005
+
+
+
+
0 to 300
0 to 350
0 to 400
0 to 500
0 to 600
0 to 750
0 to 800
0 to 1000
0 to 1200
0 to 1600
0 to 2000
0 to 2400
0 to 2500
0 to 7000
0 to 8000
+
+
+
108
109
+
+
F
202
+
+
GPM
219
113
123
208
111
0 to 25000
1.3 to 1.8
5 to 9
PH
093
10 to 20
METER
231
039
20 to 120
40 to 70
039
125
141
003
038
50 to 70
50 to 250
70 to 140
100 to 200
100 to 300
100 to 600
180 to 30
008
038
132
131
140
+
+
F
F
Reverse
range
224
Linear (continued)
1500 to 2500
2250 to 2500
1300 to 2600
–200 to +100
–125 to +375
F
F
F
F
209
203
044
020
044
020
RTD-PT100 a=0.00391
+
+
206
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
12/03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B - Available 10-inch Charts
Chart Type
Range
Units
24 HR
7 DAY
P/N 24001660-XXX
P/N 24001661-XXX
–100 to +50
C
C
C
F
091
080
021
099
047
055
048
092
087
045
–100 to +100
–100 to +200
–100 to +500
–85 to +190
–75 to +260
–50 to +25
–50 to +50
–30 to +170
–25 to +125
–20 to +30
0 to –100
0 to 120
080
021
C
C
C
C
F
055
048
087
045
117
084
C
F
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
F
144
0 to 150
122
068
081
+
+
0 to 250
0 to 400
081
083
49 to –95
50 to 100
50 to 150
100 to 200
120 to –140
180 to 30
250 to 300
–100 to +100
–40 to +60
50 to 100
50 to 120
0 to 60
061
116
132
082
121
106
080
067
061
134
161
068
081
116
F
F
F
C
C
080
067
061
+
+
RTD-PT100 a=0.00385
+
+
C
C
0 to 250
0 to 400
081
12/03
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
207
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder
B.2 Dual Range Charts
Table B-2 lists the chart part numbers for the available 10-inch dual range charts.
+ indicates the chart is used in Table 3-2 configurations.
Table B-2 10-inch Dual Range Chart Part Numbers
Calibration
Range 1
Range 2
24 HR
7 DAY
P/N 24001660-XXX P/N 24001661-XXX
Linear/Linear
0 to 15
0 to 3,000,000
35 to 0
200
–100 to +200
0 to 200
600
603
600*
602*
633*
63 to 0
0 to 2000
–18 to +94
–18 to +94
–22 to +158
0 to 50
0 to 90
35 to 0
35 to 0
603
606
601
0 to 10
174*
606*
138*
601
0 to 100
0 to 60
0 to 100
0 to 100
–30 to +70
0 to 14
+
+
+
0 to 100
621*
0 to 100
–80 to +20
30” Hg to 40 PSI
0 to 100
653*
148*
40 to 140
50 to 150
50 to 150
50 to 150
0 to 100
097
609
20 to 0
0 to 100
097
213
Linear %/Linear PH
Linear/K T/C Deg. F
Linear/RTD Deg. C
0 to 14
0 to 10
0 °F to 2000 °F
–87°C to +191 °C
0 to 100 RH
0 to 100
640*
145*
660*
207
0 to 100
Linear Deg. C/Linear
Linear Deg. F/Linear % RH
Linear Deg. F/Linear
–40 °C to +150 °C
0 °F to 120 °F
–40 °F to +300 °F
660*
661*
151*
0 to 100 RH
0 °F to 2000 °F
0 to 100
661*
645*
Linear Deg. F/K T/C Deg. F 0 °F to 3000 °F
Linear Deg. F/Linear
Linear Deg. F/PSI Linear
Linear Deg. C/Linear
Linear GPM/Linear PH
32 °F to 122 °F
0 °F to 1400 °F
–18 °C to +37 °C
0 to 100
0 to 5000
0 to 100
637*
214
200
204
+
0 to 14
0 to 250
0 to 14
Linear PSI/Linear GPM
J T/C Deg. F/Linear
0 to 150
0 to 7800
0 to 2000 PSI
0 °F to 600 °F
647*
208
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
12/03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B - Available 10-inch Charts
Calibration
Range 1
Range 2
24 HR
7 DAY
P/N 24001660-XXX P/N 24001661-XXX
0 °F to 300 °F
0 °F to 300 °F
0 °F to 400 °F
0 °F to 400 °F
0 °F to 600 °F
0 °F to 300 °F
0 to 100
617*
656*
124*
629*
611*
636*
112*
617*
0 to 400
0 to 100
0 to 800
0 to 100
0 to 500
J T/C Deg. C/K T/C Deg. C
–18 °C to +315 °C –18 °C to
+1315 °C
J T/C Deg. F/J T/C Deg. C
J T/C Deg. F/K T/C Deg. F
J T/C Deg. F
95 °F to 455 °F
0 °F to 300 °F
0 °F to 600 °F
35 °C to 235 °C
026*
186
026*
0 °F to 1500 °F
0 °F to 2400 °F
604*
649*
651*
635*
163*
127*
643*
K T/C Deg. F/J T/C Deg. F
J T/C Deg. F
1300 °F to 2000 °F 400 °F to 800 °F
0 °F to 300 °F 0 °F to 1600 °F
–100 °F to +900 °F 0 to 10
K T/C Deg. F/Linear
0 °F to 2000 °F
500 °F to 2000 °F
50 °F to 250 °F
–50 °F to +300 °F
0 to 2
0 to 1.5
0 to 100
0 to 100
0 to 100
T T/C Deg. F/Linear
T T/C Deg. C/Linear
631*
162*
–100 °C to
+100 °C
–80 °C to +180 °C
100 °F to 300 °F
–5 °C to +50 °C
0 to 100
0 to 160
0 to 100
0 to 100
0 to 100
35 to 0
657*
152*
RTD Deg. F/Linear
RTD Deg. C/Linear
102*
616*
101*
–10 °C to +60 °F
–35 °C to +75 °C
–76 °C to +100 °C
–50 °C to +100 °C
–76 °C to +100 °C
607*
638*
0 to 100
35 to 0
638*
607*
–75 °C to
+180 °C
35 to 0
608*
RTD Deg. C/Linear
–85 °C to +190 °C
–85 °C to +190 °C
12 °C to 93 °C
0 to 100
0 to 100
0 to 100
0 to 50
154*
659*
644*
646*
50 °C to 150 °C
12/03
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
209
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder
Calibration
Range 1
Range 2
24 HR
7 DAY
P/N 24001660-XXX P/N 24001661-XXX
RTD Deg. F/Linear
–50 °F to +250 °F
0 °F to 300 °F
0 to 1000
642*
+
0 to 100
0 to 160
0 to 100
0 to 100
632*
652*
616*
628*
100 °F to 300 °F
–10 °F to +60 °F
RTD Deg. C/Linear
–100 °C to
+200 °C
628*
641*
–18 °C to +94 °C
0 °C to 150 °C
0 °C to 100 °C
0 to 100
155*
222
RTD Deg. C/Linear PSIA
RTD Deg. C/RTD Deg. C
0 to 25
50 °C to 120 °C
–23.3 °C to
+93.3 °C
–87.2 °C to
+177 °C
206
RTD Deg. F/RTD Deg. F
RTD Deg. C/RTD Deg. C
*minimum purchase required
14 °F to 122 °F
104 °F to 212 °F
40 °C to 100 °C
619*
618*
–10 °C to +50 °C
210
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
12/03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix C - Setpoint Ramp/Soak
Programming and Operation
C.Setpoint Ramp/Soak Programming and Operation
C.1 Overview
Introduction
As an option, the recorder can support the programming and execution of a setpoint program (profile). A
total of twenty-four program segments are available, twelve ramp and twelve soak segments. In a ramp
segment the setpoint value is changed as specified during configuration. The ramp is configured in terms
of ramp time or ramp rate, depending on how you have configured the RPUNIT (ramp unit) parameter.
During a soak segment the setpoint is held at the specified value.
Odd-numbered segments are always ramp segments. Even-numbered segments are always soaks. These
ramp and soak segments can be used in up to four programs. You designate the beginning and end
segments to determine where the program will start or stop.
•
•
•
•
Every program must start with a ramp segment and end on a soak segment.
Recorder must be set to use SP1 (setpoint 1)
Only contiguous segments can be used by a program.
There can be overlap between programs. For example, Program 1 could use Segments 1, 2, 3, 4, 5,
and 6. Program 2 could be configured to begin with Segment 5 and end with Segment 8.
This appendix contains instructions for setting up a setpoint program, and for executing the program at
runtime.
Note that Section 4 contains instructions for using the single setpoint ramp supported by all DR4300
models. The SPRAMP (single setpoint ramp) parameter described in Section 4 must be set to DIS
(disabled) if a setpoint program is to be used.
ATTENTION
If power is lost during execution of a program, upon power-up the recorder will use the last
setpoint value prior to the beginning of the setpoint program. The program is placed in hold at the
beginning. The Manual/Auto mode will be as configured under “PWR UP” in the “CONTROL”
group.
What’s in this section?
This section contains the following information:
Topic
See Page
12/03
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
211
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder
C.2 Program Contents
What you will configure
You will configure all the data that is relevant to each ramp and soak segment for a given setpoint versus
time program (profile). The recorder will prompt you through the sequence of segments and associated
Ramp unit
The ramp unit selection determines the engineering units for the ramp segments.
The selections are:
•
•
TIME = Hours:Minutes
EU-H = Degrees/Hour OR EU-M = Degrees/Minute
Recycle number
The recycle number allows the program to recycle a specified number of times from beginning to end.
Range = 0 to 99
•
Program state
The program state selection determines the program state after completion.
The selections are:
•
•
DIS = program is disabled
HOLD = program on hold
Ramp time or rate segments
A ramp segment is used to change the setpoint to the next soak setpoint value in the program.
•
•
Ramps are odd-numbered segments. Segment 1 will be the initial ramp.
Ramps are specifed in terms of either:
TIME* - Hours:Minutes
or
Range = 0-99 hr:59 min
EU-M* - Degrees/Minute
EU-H* - Degrees/Hour
Range = 0 to 999
* The selection of time or rate is made at prompt “RP UNIT”.
Set this prompt before entering any Ramp information.
ATTENTION
Entering “0” will imply an immediate step change in setpoint to the next soak.
212
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
12/03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix C - Setpoint Ramp/Soak
Programming and Operation
Soak segments
A soak segment is a combination of soak setpoint (value) and a soak duration (time).
•
•
•
Soaks are even-numbered segments.
Segment 2 will be the initial soak value and soak time.
The soak setpoint range value must be within the setpoint high and low range limits in engineering
units. (Specify the setpoint range with SP HI and SP LO in the control group as described in Section
4.)
•
•
Soak time is the duration of the soak and is determined in:
TIME - Hours:Minutes
Range = 0-99 hrs:59 min.
At the conclusion of program execution, the recorder will use the setpoint achieved during the last
soak segment.
Start segment number for each program
The start segment number designates the number of the first segment.
•
Range = 1 to 23 (odd-numbered segments only)
End segment number for each program
The end segment number designates the number of the last segment, it must be a soak segment (even-
numbered).
•
Range = 2 to 24 (even-numbered segments only)
Guaranteed soak
A SOKDEV (soak deviation) parameter is provided. If its value is not zero, then soaking will be frozen for
each segment until the difference (plus or minus) between PV and SP is less than or equal to the value of
SOKDEV.
There are no guaranteed soaks whenever SOKDEV = 0. In this case, soak segments start timing soak
duration as soon as the soak setpoint is first reached, regardless of where the process variable remains
relative to the soak setpoint during the duration of the segment.
The decimal location corresponds to input 1 decimal selection.
Digital input (remote) operation
Program can be placed in RUN or HOLD state through a remote dry contact connected to optional digital
input terminals. The REMSW1 and REMSW2 parameters mus be configured to support this function. The
valid values for those parameters are:
•
•
RUN—contact closure places program in RUN state, and lower display will flash “run n”
HOLD—contact closure places program in HOLD state, and lower display will flash “hold”
Opening contact reverts to original state.
12/03
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
213
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder
C.3 Drawing a Ramp/Soak Profile
Ramp/soak profile example
Before you perform the actual configuration, we recommend that you draw your Ramp/Soak profiles in the
space provided on the blank graphs and fill in the associated information on the worksheet. An example of
a Ramp-Soak Profile using the first twelve segments for Program 1 is shown in Figure C-1. Start setpoint
in this example is at 200 °F.
Figure C-1 Ramp/Soak Profile Example
Prompt
START1
END 1
Function
Start Seg.
Segment
Value
Prompt
SG6 SP
SG6 TI
Function
Soak SP
Segment
Value
1
6
6
7
250
End Seg.
12
2
Soak Time
Ramp
3 hr:0 min
Number of
Recycles
2 hr:30 min
RECYCL
SG7 RP
Deviation Value
Ramp Units
0
Soak SP
Soak Time
Ramp
8
8
9
500
SOKDEV
RP UNIT
END ST
SG8 SP
SG8 TI
TIME
0 hr:30 min
0
Program
HOLD
SG9 RP
State at end
Ramp
1
2
2
3
4
4
5
1 hr
Soak SP
Soak Time
Ramp
10
10
11
12
12
400
SG1 RP
SG2 SP
SG2 TI
SG10SP
SG10TI
SG11RP
SG12SP
SG12TI
Soak SP
Soak Time
Ramp
300
0 hr:30 min
3 hr:30min
200
1 hr:30 min
1 hr
Soak SP
Soak Time
SG3 RP
SG4 SP
SG4 TI
Soak SP
Soak Time
Ramp
400
0 hr:30 min
1 hr
1 hr:30 min.
SG5 RP
214
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
12/03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix C - Setpoint Ramp/Soak
Programming and Operation
Profile graphs
Draw your ramp/soak profiles on the graphs below and fill in the associated information in the worksheet.
This will give you a permanent record of your program and will assist you when entering the ramp and
soak values.
20766
12/03
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
215
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder
216
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
12/03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix C - Setpoint Ramp/Soak
Programming and Operation
Profile worksheet
Prompt
START1
END 1
Function
Segment
Value
Prompt
SG9 RP
SG10SP
SG10TI
SG11RP
SG12SP
SG12TI
SG13RP
SG14SP
SG14TI
SG15RP
SG16SP
Function
Ramp
Segment
Value
Start Seg Prog 1
End Seg Prog 1
Start Seg Prog 2
End Seg Prog 2
Start Seg Prog 3
End Seg Prog 3
Start Seg Prog 4
End Seg Prog 4
Deviation Value
Ramp Units
9
Soak SP
Soak TIme
Ramp
10
10
11
12
12
13
14
14
15
16
START2
END 2
Soak SP
Soak TIme
Ramp
START3
END 3
START4
END 4
Soak SP
Soak TIme
Ramp
SOKDEV
RP UNIT
END ST
Program
Soak SP
State at end
Ramp
1
2
2
3
4
4
5
6
6
7
8
8
Soak TIme
Ramp
16
17
18
18
19
20
20
21
22
22
23
24
24
SG1 RP
SG2 SP
SG2 TI
SG16TI
SG17RP
SG18SP
SG18TI
SG19RP
SG20SP
SG20TI
SG21RP
SG22SP
SG22TI
SG23RP
SG24SP
SG24TI
Soak SP
Soak Time
Ramp
Soak SP
Soak TIme
Ramp
SG3 RP
SG4 SP
SG4 TI
Soak SP
Soak Time
Ramp
Soak SP
Soak TIme
Ramp
SG5 RP
SG6 SP
SG6 TI
Soak SP
Soak TIme
Ramp
Soak SP
Soak TIme
Ramp
SG7 RP
SG8 SP
SG8 TI
Soak SP
Soak TIme
Soak SP
Soak Time
12/03
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
217
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder
C.4 Setpoint Program Prompt Hierarchy
Table C-1 lists all the function prompts for Setpoint Program data configuration in the order of their
appearance. These prompts are available when SPPROG is enabled in the SPRAMP set up group
described in Section 4.
All parameters may be changed while the program is disabled or in HOLD.
Table C-1 Prompt Hierarchy and Available Selections
Lower Display
Prompt
Upper Display
Range of Setting
or Selection
Parameter
Definition
SPPROG
SETPOINT PROGRAMMING—This must be set to ENAB
for the setpoint program feature to work, and for the
associated operating parameters to be displayed.
SPRAMP must be disabled. (See Section 4.)
DIS
ENAB
DIS—Disabled
ENAB—Enabled
1,3,5,7,9,11,13,15,17,19,
21,23 [factory setting=1]
START 1
END 1
START SEGMENT FOR PROGRAM 1—Enter the
number of the first segment in Program 1.
2,4,6,8,10,12,14,16,18,20,22,
END SEGMENT FOR PROGRAM 1—Enter the number
24 [factory setting=6]
of the last segment in Program 1.
1,3,5,7,9,11,13,15,17,19,
21,23 [factory setting=7]
START 2
END 2
START SEGMENT FOR PROGRAM 2—Enter the
number of the first segment in Program 2.
2,4,6,8,10,12,14,16,18,20,22,
END SEGMENT FOR PROGRAM 2—Enter the number
24 [factory setting=12]
of the last segment in Program 2.
1,3,5,7,9,11,13,15,17,19,
21,23 [factory setting=13]
START 3
END 3
START SEGMENT FOR PROGRAM 3—Enter the
number of the first segment in Program 3.
2,4,6,8,10,12,14,16,18,20,22,
END SEGMENT FOR PROGRAM 3—Enter the number
24 [factory setting=18]
of the last segment in Program 3.
1,3,5,7,9,11,13,15,17,19,
21,23 [factory setting=19]
START 4
END 4
START SEGMENT FOR PROGRAM 4—Enter the
number of the first segment in Program 4.
2,4,6,8,10,12,14,16,18,20,22,
END SEGMENT FOR PROGRAM 4—Enter the number
24 [factory setting=24]
of the last segment in Program 4.
0 to 99
[factory setting=0]
RECYCL
SOKDEV
RECYCLES—Enter the number of times the program
selected for execution will be repeated.
–99.9 to 99.9 engineering
units
SOAK DEVIATION—Enter the acceptable deviation from
setpoint during a soak cycle. If the PV differs from the
setpoint by more than the value of SOKDEV, soak time is
frozen.
[factory setting=0.00]
There are no guaranteed soaks if SOKDEV = 0.
218
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
12/03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix C - Setpoint Ramp/Soak
Programming and Operation
Lower Display
Prompt
Upper Display
Range of Setting
or Selection
Parameter
Definition
RPUNIT
RAMP UNITS—The selection you make here will
determine whether the ramp segments will be configured
in terms of time or in terms of rate.
TIME [factory setting]
TIME—Ramps will be configured in hrs:min.
EU-M
Engineering Units per Minute—Ramps will be
configured as a rate in EU-M.
EU-H
Engineering Units per Hour—Ramps will be configured
as a rate in EU-H.
DIS [factory setting]
HOLD
END ST
SG1 RP
END STATE—Specify whether the program will be
disabled after execution, or be placed in Hold.
0 to 99 hours:0 to 59 min
SEGMENT 1 RAMP VALUE—Enter the ramp time or
(if RPUNIT = TIME)
ramp value for Segment 1.
or
Whether ramp segments are configured in terms of
time or rate depends on whether RPUNIT is set to
TIME or EU-M/EU-H.
0 to 999 degrees per minute
or hour (if RPUNIT = EU-M
or EU-H)
[factory setting=0.00]
range depends on setpoint
limits [factory setting=0]
SG2 SP
SG2 TI
SEGMENT 2 SETPOINT—Enter the setpoint for Segment
2.
0 to 99 hours:0 to 59 min
SEGMENT 2 TIME—Enter the duration for Segment 2
[factory setting=0]
0 to 99 hours:0 to 59 min
SG3 RP
SEGMENT 3 RAMP VALUE—Enter the ramp time or
(if RPUNIT = TIME)
ramp value for Segment 3.
or
0 to 999 degrees per minute
or hour (if RPUNIT = EU-M
or EU-H)
[factory setting=0.00]
range depends on setpoint
limits [factory setting 0]
SG4 SP
SG4 TI
SEGMENT 4 SETPOINT—Enter the setpoint for Segment
4.
0 to 99 hours:0 to 59 min
SEGMENT 4 TIME—Enter the duration for Segment 4
[factory setting=0]
12/03
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
219
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder
Lower Display
Prompt
Upper Display
Range of Setting
or Selection
Parameter
Definition
.
.
.
Continue to configure ramp segments (odd-numbered) and soak segments (even-numbered) through
Segments 23 and 24.
.
.
.
0 to 99 hours:0 to 59 min
SG23RP
SEGMENT 23 RAMP VALUE—Enter the ramp time or
(if RPUNIT = TIME)
ramp value for Segment 23.
or
0 to 999 degrees per minute
or hour (if RPUNIT = EU-M
or EU-H)
[factory setting = 0.00]
range depends on setpoint
limits [factory setting = 0]
SG24SP
SG24TI
SEGMENT 24 SETPOINT—Enter the setpoint for
Segment 24.
0 to 99 hours:0 to 59 min
SEGMENT 24 TIME—Enter the duration for Segment 24
[factory setting = 0]
220
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
12/03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix C - Setpoint Ramp/Soak
Programming and Operation
C.5 Run/Monitor the Program
Introduction
Prior to running the program, make sure all the SPPROG prompts under the SPRAMP set up group
“HOLD” appears periodically in the lower display indicating that the program is in the HOLD state.
ATTENTION
SP Programm parameters cannot be changed during RUN state (must be in HOLD state).
Run/Monitor functions
Table C-2 lists all the functions required to run and monitor the program.
Table C-2 Run/Monitor Functions
Function
Press
Result
Set the Local Setpoint
You will see
input value
SP and local setpoint value. (If control
set up group NumSPs = TWO, make sure the recorder is
set to use setpoint 1 by checking that operating
parameter UseSP1 is displayed.
If UseSP2 is displayed, use ▲ or ▼ to switch to UseSP1.)
To set the Local Setpoint value to where you want the
program to start out.
Selecting the Program
to be Run
until
To select the program where n is the program number 1
through 4.
12/03
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
221
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder
Function
Press
Result
Putting the Program in
the Run State
until
to toggle from “HOLD” to
to indicate that the program is running.
Putting the Program in
the Hold State
until
to toggle from “RUN” to
to hold the program at the current
setpoint.
External Hold
If the recorder supports digital inputs, and REMSWn is
set to HOLD, then when the contact n closes, the
program will be placed in hold (if the setpoint program is
running).
The “hold” in the lower display will be displayed
periodically in lower case.
ATTENTION The keypad takes priority over the external
switch for the RUN/HOLD function.
Contact reopening runs the program.
External Run
If the recorder supports digital inputs, and REMSWn is
set to RUN, then when the contact n closes, the program
will be run (if the setpoint program is enabled).
The “run n” in the lower display will be displayed
periodically in lower case.
ATTENTION The keypad takes priority over the external
switch for the RUN/HOLD function.
Contact reopening holds the program.
input value
Viewing the Present
Ramp or Soak Segment
Number and Time
until you see
XX HH . MM
Time remaining in the SEGMENT in
hours and minutes
XX = 1 to 24
222
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
12/03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix C - Setpoint Ramp/Soak
Programming and Operation
Function
Press
Result
Viewing the Number of
Cycles Left for the
Program
input value
until you see
REC.X
Number of cycles remaining in the
setpoint program
X = 0 to 99
Ending the Program
When the final segment is completed, the “RUN” in the
lower display either changes to “HOLD” (if configured for
HOLD state), or disappears (if configured for disable of
setpoint programming).
The recorder will operate at the last setpoint achieved by
the program.
Disable Program
until you see
until you see
or
until you see
Exit configuration and program is disabled.
12/03
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
223
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder
224
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
12/03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix D - Using Accutune II
D.Using Accutune II
D.1 Overview
Introduction
Accutune II provides foolproof, trouble-free on-demand tuning in the recorder. No knowledge of the
process is required at start-up. The operator simply enters the desired setpoint and initiates the tuning. The
recorder immediately starts controlling to the setpoint while it identifies the process, calculates the tuning
constants and enters them into the tuning set up group, and begins PID control with the correct tuning
parameters. This works with any process, including integrating type processes, and allows retuning at a
fixed setpoint. The tuning sequence will cycle the recorder’s output two full cycles between 0 % and 100
% (or low and high output limits) while allowing only a very small process variable change above and
below the setpoint during each cycle.
•
•
•
Accutune works for all control algorithms except ON/OFF.
The recorder must be in Auto mode.
Accutune works for integrating processes.
Enable/disable Accutune using the tuning set up group TUNE parameter described in Section 4.
Detailed instructions for using Accutune are provided in this appendix.
What’s in this section?
This section contains the following information:
Topic
See Page
12/03
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
225
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder
D.2 Starting and Stopping Tuning with Accutune II
Procedure
After “TUNE” has been enabled in the tuning set up group as described in Section 4, use the procedure in
Table D-1 to start tuning.
To abort tuning in progress, press the MAN/AUTO/RESET key to take the recorder out of Auto mode.
The message “AbRT” (abort) will be displayed as the value of tuning set up group parameter “AT ERR”.
The tuning parameters will retain the values they had at the start of the Accutune operation.
Table D-1 Procedure for Starting Accutune II
Step
1
Press
Action/Result
Lower Display
TuneOF
If “TuneOF” (tune off) does not appear, then
Accutune is not enabled.
DISP
until you see
to toggle to
2
Lower Display
TuneON
or
Tuning will begin and the lower display will flash
“TUNING”. When tuning has been completed the
lower display will again show “TuneOF”.
226
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
12/03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix D - Using Accutune II
D.3 Using Accutune with Duplex (Heat/Cool) Control
Introduction
“TUNE” can be done for applications using Duplex (Heat/Cool) control.
During tuning, Accutune II assumes SP 1 will cause a Heating demand, and then the calculated tuning
parameters will be automatically entered as the first set of PID constants. Likewise, it assumes tuning at
Local SP 2 will cause a Cooling demand, and the cooling parameters will be entered as the second set of
PID constants.
Procedure
After “TUNE” has been enabled in the tuning set up group as described in Section 4, use the procedure in
Table D-2 to start tuning. Note that control group parameter “NumSPs” must be set to “TWO” to enable
the second setpoint.
To abort tuning in progress, press the MAN/AUTO/RESET key to take the recorder out of Auto mode.
The message “AbRT” (abort) will be displayed as the value of tuning set up group parameter “AT ERR”.
The tuning parameters will retain the values they had at the start of the Accutune operation.
Table D-2 Procedure for Using Accutune for Duplex Control
Step
Press
Action/Result
Heating Tuning
1
Lower Display
SP nnn
Display Setpoint 1.
DISP
until you see
2
Until the value of Setpoint 1 is at the desired value within the Heat
zone.
or
Make sure the recorder is in Auto mode. (“A” indicator lit.)
If not, use the MAN/AUTO/RESET key to put the unit in Auto.
3
4
5
Lower Display
DISP
UseSPn
This is the prompt used to select the setpoint. If
it is not “USESP1”, use
or
to switch to “USESP1”.
until you see
Lower Display
TuneOF
DISP
If “TuneOF” (tune off) does not appear, then
Accutune is not enabled.
until you see
to toggle to
Lower Display
TuneON
or
Tuning will begin and the lower display will flash
“TUNING”. The output will cycle between 50 %
and 100 % (or high output limit). When tuning has
been completed the lower display will again show
“TuneOF”. The Heat tuning parameters are
entered for the first set of PID constants in the
tuning set up group.
12/03
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
227
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder
Step
Press
DISP
Action/Result
Cooling Tuning
6
Lower Display
S2 nnn
Display Setpoint 2.
until you see
7
Until the value of Setpoint 2 is at the desired value within the
Cooling zone.
or
Lower Display
UseSP1
8
9
DISP
until you see
to toggle to.
Lower Display
UseSP2
or
Lower Display
TuneOF
10
11
DISP
until you see
to toggle to
Lower Display
or
TuneON
Tuning will begin and the lower display will flash
“TUNING”. The output will cycle between 0 %
and 50 % (or low output limit). When tuning has
been completed the lower display will again show
“TuneOF”. The Cool tuning parameters are
entered for the second set of PID constants in the
tuning set up group.
228
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
12/03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix E – Foreign Language Safety Instructions
E. Foreign Language Safety Instructions
12/03
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
229
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder
230
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
12/03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix E – Foreign Language Safety Instructions
12/03
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
231
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder
232
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
12/03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix E – Foreign Language Safety Instructions
12/03
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
233
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder
234
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
12/03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix E – Foreign Language Safety Instructions
12/03
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
235
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder
236
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
12/03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix E – Foreign Language Safety Instructions
12/03
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
237
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder
238
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
12/03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix E – Foreign Language Safety Instructions
GR2I-6055
¦µ¦®¹¬¸ª®¸ ¦¸»¦°ª®¦¸
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
!
ꢀ
ꢁꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
.
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
.
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢂꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
.
•
•
•
•
•
ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ ꢃ ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢁꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
.
ꢄꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
.
ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢄ.
ꢀ
.
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ ꢃ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
.
¼¦¶¦¯¹¬¶®¸¹®¯¦ ª³´®®°®¸±´º
100 240 V 20
ꢀ
ꢀ27 V ac/dc
49 – 61 Hz
ꢀ
20 watts max
¸º²Í¬¯ª¸ µª¶®§¦°°´²¹´¸
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ
ꢂꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
.
: 0
55°C
5
90 %
ꢀ
/ 40°C
ꢀ: 0 – 200 Hz
: 0.5 g
ª¨¯¦¹¦¸¹¦¸¬ ª³´µ°®¸±´º
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
.
12/03
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
239
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder
240
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
12/03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix F – Honeywell Service Centers
F. Honeywell Service Centers
For application assistance, current specifications, pricing, or name of the nearest Authorized Distributor,
contact one of the offices below.
ARGENTINA
CANADA
ICELAND
REPUBLIC OF IRELAND
HONEYWELL
Unit 1
Robinhood Business
Park
SPAIN
HONEYWELL S.A
Factory
Josefa Valcarcel, 24
28027 MADRID
SPAIN
Honeywell S.A.I.C.
Belgrano 1156
Buenos Aires
Argentina
Tel. : 54 1 383 9290
Honeywell Limited
The Honeywell Centre
300 Yorkland Blvd.
Toronto, Ontario
M2j 1s1
HONEYWELL
Hataekni .hf
Armuli 26
PO Box 8336
128 reykjavik
Iceland
Robinhood Road
DUBLIN 22
Canada
Tel. : 34 91 31 3 61 00
ASIA PACIFIC
Honeywell Asia
Pacific Inc.
Room 3213-3225
Sun Kung Kai Centre
N° 30 Harbour Road
Wanchai
Tel.: 800 461 0013
Fax:: 416 502 5001
Tel : 354 588 5000
Republic of Ireland
Tel. : 353 1 4565944
SWEDEN
ITALY
HONEYWELL S.p.A.
HONEYWELL A.B.
S-127 86 Skarholmen
STOCKHOLM
SWEDEN
Tel. : 46 8 775 55 00
CZECH REPUBLIC
HONEYWELL, Spol.S.R.O. Via P. Gobetti, 2/b
Budejovicka 1
140 21 Prague 4
Czech Republic
Tel. : 42 2 6112 3434
REPUBLIC OF
SINGAPORE
20063 Cernusco Sul
Naviglio
ITALY
HONEYWELL PTE LTD
BLOCK 750E CHAI
CHEE ROAD
06-01 CHAI CHEE IND.PARK
1646 SINGAPORE
REP. OF SINGAPORE
Tel. : 65 2490 100
Hong Kong
Tel. : 852 829 82 98
Tel. : 39 02 92146 1
SWITZERLAND
HONEYWELL A.G.
Hertistrasse 2
8304 WALLISELLEN
SWITZERLAND
AUSTRALIA
DENMARK
MEXICO
HONEYWELL S.A. DE
CV
AV. CONSTITUYENTES
900
COL. LOMAS ALTAS
11950 MEXICO CITY
MEXICO
Honeywell Limited
5 Thomas Holt Drive
North Ryde Sydney
Nsw Australia 2113
Tel. : 61 2 353 7000
HONEYWELL A/S
Automatikvej 1
DK 2860 Soeborg
DENMARK
Tel. : 41 1 831 02 71
REPUBLIC OF SOUTH
AFRICA
HONEYWELL
Southern Africa
PO BOX 138
Milnerton 7435
REPUBLIC OF SOUTH
AFRICA
Tel. : 45 39 55 56 58
TURKEY
HONEYWELL A.S.
Caryiryolu Sok No. 7
Ucgen Plaza, Kat 5-6-7
Icerenkoy 81120 Instanbul
Turkey
AUSTRIA
Honeywell Austria
G.M.B.H.
Handelskai 388
A1020 Vienna
Austria
FINLAND
HONEYWELL OY
Ruukintie 8
FIN-02320 ESPOO 32
FINLAND
Tel. : 358 0 3480101
Tel : 52 5 259 1966
THE NETHERLANDS
HONEYWELL BV
Laaderhoogtweg 18
1101 EA AMSTERDAM
ZO
Tel. : 27 11 805 12 01
Tel (90-216) 575 66 00
Tel. : 43 1 727 800
ROMANIA
HONEYWELL Office
Bucharest
147 Aurel Vlaicu Str.,
Sc.Z.,
Apt 61/62
R-72921 Bucharest
ROMANIA
Tel : 40-1 211 00 76/
211 79
UNITED KINGDOM
HONEYWELL
Honeywell House
Arlington Business Park
Bracknell,
Berkshire
RG12 1EB
Tel: +44 (0) 1344 656000
FRANCE
BELGIUM
THE NETHERLANDS
Tel : 31 20 56 56 911
HONEYWELL S.A.
Bâtiment « le Mercury »
Parc Technologique de St
Aubin
Route de l’Orme
(CD 128)
91190 SAINT-AUBIN
FRANCE
Tel. from France:
01 60 19 80 00
From other countries:
33 1 60 19 80 00
Honeywell S.A.
3 Avenue De Bourget
B-1140 Brussels
Belgium
NORWAY
HONEYWELL A/S
Askerveien 61
PO Box 263
N-1371 ASKER
NORWAY
Tel. : 32 2 728 27 11
BRAZIL
HONEYWELL DO
Brazil
And Cia
Rua Jose Alves Da
Chunha
Lima 172
Butanta
05360.050 Sao Paulo
Sp
Brazil
U.S.A.
HONEYWELL INC.
INDUSTRIAL PROCESS
CONTROLS
1100 VIRGINIA DRIVE
PA 19034-3260
FT. WASHINGTON
U.S.A.
Tel. : 47 66 76 20 00
RUSSIA
HONEYWELL INC
4 th Floor Administrative
Builiding of AO "Luzhniki"
Management
24 Luzhniki
119048 Moscow
RUSSIA
POLAND
HONEYWELL Sp.z.o.o
UI Domaniewksa 41
02-672 WARSAW
POLAND
GERMANY
HONEYWELL AG
Kaiserleistrasse 39
D-63067 OFFENBACH
GERMANY
Tel. : 1-800-343-0228
Tel. : 48 22 606 09 00
Tel : 7 095 796 98 00/01
VENEZUELA
Tel. : 55 11 819 3755
Tel. : 49 69 80 64444
PORTUGAL
HONEYWELL
HONEYWELL CA
APARTADO 61314
1060 CARACAS
VENEZUELA
SLOVAKIA
BULGARIA
HUNGARY
HONEYWELL Kft
Gogol u 13
H-1133 BUDAPEST
HUNGARY
Tel. : 36 1 451 43 00
PORTUGAL LDA
Edificio Suecia II
Av. do Forte nr 3 - Piso 3
2795 CARNAXIDE
PORTUGAL
HONEYWELL Ltd
Mlynske nivy 73
PO Box 75
820 07 BRATISLAVA 27
SLOVAKIA
HONEYWELL EOOD
14, Iskarsko Chausse
POB 79
BG- 1592 Sofia
BULGARIA
Tel. : 58 2 239 0211
Tel. : 351 1 424 50 00
Tel. : 421 7 52 47 400/425
Tel : 359-791512/
794027/ 792198
12/03
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
241
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder
242
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
12/03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
Index
CALTST, 124, 174, 175
CE conformity, 1, 23
CFGERR error message, 177
CFGTST, 124, 174, 177
chart
—2—
—4—
—A—
20 mA V parameter, 110
4mAVA parameter, 110
ACTION parameter, 97
replacing, 158
chart high range value. See CHTHI parameter
chart low range value. See CHTLO parameter
chart parameters set up group, 90
chart plate
components, 66, 120
parts, 193
chart rotation troubleshooting
with display, 183
without display, 167
chart speed. See CHTSPD parameter
chart time
with display, 123
without display, 69
chart type. See CHTTYP parameter
CHTHI parameter, 89
CHTLO parameter, 89
CHTSPD parameter, 90
CHTTYP parameter, 90
Circuit breakers, 27
cleaning pen arm, 160
CNFTST, 175
ADDRES parameter, 111
AL HYS parameter, 107, 108
alarm hysteresis, 107, 108
alarm setpoints, 106, 113, 135
alarms
configuration, 106
troubleshooting, 186
alarms set up group, 106
aligning pens
with display, 188
without display, 169
AT ERR parameter, 101
automatic mode, 96, 133
AUX OUT parameter, 109
auxilary output set up group, 109
COMM parameter, 111
—B—
communications
set up group, 111
troubleshooting, 187
Communications
specifications, 14
wiring, 35
compensated calibrator, 147
BAUD parameter, 111
BIAS parameter, 87
BRNOUT parameter, 79, 81, 88, 175
burnout
with display, 81, 88
without display, 64
configuration
with display, 74, 83
without display, 45
—C—
configuration checksum test (with display), 124, 174,
177
CAL IN parameter, 137, 151
CALERR error message, 177
configuration prompt hierarchy, 75
configuration record sheet, 117
configuration tips, 78
calibration of inputs (with display), 141
calibration of outputs (with display), 153
calibration set up group, 151
CONTRL parameter, 94, 124, 174
control algorithm. See CTRALG parameter
control hysteresis, 97
control set up group, 94
control setpoints, 94, 134
calibration test (with display), 124, 174, 177
calibration values, 87
entering field values, 151
selecting factory or field, 136
troubleshooting, 177
12/03
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
243
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder
CTRALG parameter, 95, 100, 102, 103
current outputs, 94
calibration, 141, 154
Current outputs, 41
—G—
GAIN 2 parameter, 103
GAIN parameter, 98, 101, 102
current range. See CURRNG parameter
CURRNG parameter, 95
CYC TI parameter, 103
CYC2TI parameter, 103
cycle timer. See CYC TI parameter
—H—
heat/cool application, 101, 102, 103
Heavy Duty door mounting, 18
HOLD status message, 131, 176
HOUR parameter, 90
—D—
HYST parameter, 97
hysteresis. See alarm hysteresis and control hysteresis
DBAND parameter, 97
deadband. See DBAND parameter
decimal point location. See DECMAL parameter
DECMAL parameter, 85
derivative term, 92, 96
diagnostic tests
with display, 124, 131, 173, 174
without display, 166
digital inputs
—I—
I MIN parameter, 99, 102
I RPM parameter, 99, 102
I2 MIN parameter, 103
I2 RPM parameter, 103
ice bath, 148
IN PHI parameter, 87
configuration, 89, 93, 112, 113
IN PLO parameter, 87
Dimensions, 15
IN TYP parameter, 86, 136, 177
indicators on display, 72, 129
ink cartridges
part numbers, 193
replacing, 159
INP FL error message, 178
direct action control. See ACTION parameter
display
description, 72, 128
testing, 125, 184
display cable, 79
door assembly parts, 192
INPRNG error message, 178
input actuation type. See IN TYP parameter
input bias
—E—
EEFAIL error message, 177
electrical noise, 162, 172
Electrical noise precautions, 23, 28
END 1 parameter, 218
END ST parameter, 219
error messages, 131, 176
External switches, 33
with display, 87
Input bias
with display, 1
input calibration (with display), 141
input failure
with display, 81, 88, 178
input filter
with display, 87
Input filter, 1, 13
—F—
input high range value. See INPHI parameter
input out of range, 178
input set up group, 85
Input wiring
analog, 31
digital, 33
INSPAN parameter, 152
Installation, 11
integral control. See I RPM parameter. See I MIN
parameter
integral term, 99
INZERO parameter, 152
factory calibration (with display), 141
failsafe mode, 88, 98, 124, 133, 174, 175
FAILSF error message, 177
FAILSF parameter, 98, 124, 174
field calibration (with display), 141
FILTER parameter, 87
FINL SP parameter, 104
Flush mounting, 17
Fuses, 27
fuzzy overshoot suppression, 100
FUZZY parameter, 101
244
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
12/03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
operating parameters, 73, 130
operation
with display, 119, 128
without display, 65
operator interface, 72, 128
limit control, 139
—J—
—K—
J6 connector, 79
Key error, 125
KEY ERROR, 125
key functions, 73, 130
OUT HI parameter, 97
OUT LO parameter, 97
OUTALG parameter, 94, 101, 103
OUTLAG parameter, 95
output calibration (with display), 141, 154
output limits, 97
keypad
description, 72, 128
testing, 125, 184
Knockout locations, 16, 24
output set up (with display), 74
Output wiring
current outputs, 41
relays, 37
—L—
L DISP parameter, 105
outputs
LD CAL parameter, 87, 136, 152
limit control, 139
troubleshooting, 185
LED indicators, 166
with display, 176
limit controller, 73
configuration, 118, 137
resetting, 139
LIMIT parameter, 118
load calibration values. See LD CAL parameter
—P—
P3 connector, 167, 183
Panel cutout, 15
parts list, 191
LOCK parameter, 78, 83, 114, 115, 151, 154
PB 2 parameter, 103
PB parameter, 98, 101, 102
PBorGN parameter, 98
pen alignment set up group, 188
pen group prompts, 89
pen input. See PENIN parameter
pen set up group, 89
pen step test, 67
pen trace troubleshooting
with display, 182
without display, 166
PEN0 parameter, 188
—M—
maintenance, 157
MANRST parameter, 102
manual mode, 96, 133
manual reset. See MANRST parameter
memory test (with display), 124, 174
memory test (with display), 178
MINRPM parameter, 99
Modbus. See communications
Model number breakdown, 4
motor cable, 167, 183
PENIN parameter, 81, 89, 123
pens
Mounting
alignment
dimensions, 15
flush, 17
surface, 21
with display, 188
without display, 169
maintenance, 160
part numbers, 193
replacing, 159
Mounting methods
2-inch pipe, 20
Flush in panel, 17
NEMA4 or Heavy Duty door, 18
Panel or Wall Surface, 21
troubleshooting
with display, 184
without display, 168
PERIOD parameter, 105
—N—
Pipe mounting, 20
Plug locations, 16, 24
NEMA4 door mounting, 18
NumSPs parameter, 94
Pn ERR error message, 124, 178
power up controller mode recall. See PWR UP parameter
power up state for limit control. See POWRUP parameter
Power wiring, 28
—O—
POWRUP parameter, 118
Operating limits, 12
12/03
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
245
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder
prompt hierarchy, 76
setpoint high range limit. See SP HI parameter
setpoint low limit. See SP LO parameter
setpoint low range limit. See SP LO parameter. See SP LO
parameter
proportional band. See PB parameter
proportional control, 96, 100, 103
PWR UP parameter, 96
setpoint program, 104, 211
status display, 73
setpoint ramp group, 104
setpoints. See control setpoints and alarm setpoints
setup switch. See SW5 run/setup switch
SG1 RP parameter, 219
SG2 SP parameter, 219
SG2 TI parameter, 219
software version, 173
SOKDEV parameter, 218
SP HI parameter, 97, 118
SP LO parameter, 97, 118
SP PROG parameter, 104
SP RAMP parameter, 104
spare parts, 191
Specifications, 12
SPPROG parameter, 218
square root of input, 86
START 1 parameter, 218
—R—
raise switch. See SW3 raise switch
RAMTST, 124, 174, 175
range values for calibration, 142
rate. See RATE T parameter
RATE parameter, 92
RATE T parameter, 102
RATE2T parameter, 103
real time values, 130
recorder failure troubleshooting
with display, 181
without display, 165
recorder part numbers, 194
recording set up
with display, 74
without display, 45
RECYCL parameter, 218
reference accuracy, 199
relays, 94, 107, 139, 185, 186
Relays, 13, 37
remote switch 1. See REMSW1 parameter
remote switch 2. See REMSW2 parameter
remote switch set up group, 112
remote switches. See digital inputs
REMSW1 parameter, 93, 113
REMSW2 parameter, 113
START parameter, 105
startup
with display, 119, 123, 126
without display, 65, 69
status set up group, 175
step test
with display, 121
without display, 67
Surface mounting, 21
SW1 configuration switches
with display, 79
replacement parts, 191
replacing ink cartridges, 159
replacing the chart, 158
without display, 46, 49, 67
SW2 reset switch, 166, 178
RESET key, 118
SW3 raise switch, 169
RESET parameter, 91
SW4 lower switch, 169
SW5 run/setup switch, 67, 169
reset switch SW2, 166, 178
reverse acting control. See ACTION parameter
RPUNIT parameter, 219
RSTABL parameter, 93, 137
RUN status message, 131, 176
run switch. See SW5 run/setup switch
SW6 burnout switch 5
with display, 79, 81
SW6 input switches
with display, 79, 80
without display, 46, 49
switch settings
—S—
with display, 79
without display, 46, 49
Switches
safety precautions, 45, 65, 66, 67, 79, 119, 120, 121,
141, 161, 164, 169, 171, 180
Safety precautions, 27
external, 27
scale factor. See SCALER parameter
SCALER parameter, 92
—T—
set up
TB1 terminal, 165
TB2 terminal, 31
TB3 terminal, 38
with display, 74
without display, 45
setpoint high limit. See SP HI parameter
246
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
12/03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
TB5 terminal, 153
TUNING status message, 131, 176
temperature units. See UNITS parameter
TESTFL error message, 124, 174, 178
tests
—U—
UNITS parameter, 85
display and keypad, 125, 184
pen step, 67
self-diagnostic (with display), 124, 131, 174
self-diagnostic (without display), 166
TIM IN parameter, 104
—W—
warnings, 65, 79, 119, 141, 161, 164, 171, 180
Warnings, 27, 28
time index
Wire bundling, 26
wiring
with display, 123
without display, 69
timer
configuration, 105
display, 73, 105
operation, 138
TIMER parameter, 105
for calibration, 146, 153
limit control, 139
Wiring
analog inputs, 31
communication, 35
current outputs, 41
digital inputs, 33
insulation, 38, 41
relay outputs, 37
routing, 24
TOTAL parameter, 91, 92
totalizer, 91
configuration, 91
resetting, 91, 137
totalizer set up group, 91
transmitter delay. See XmtDLY parameter
transmitter input characterization, 86
Transmitter wiring, 43
transmitter power out, 43
—X—
troubleshooting
XMITTR parameter, 86
XmtDLY parameter, 111
XRSET parameter, 118
with display, 171
without display, 161
TUNE parameter, 101
tuning set up groupt, 100
12/03
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
247
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
248
DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder Product Manual
12/03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Industrial Measurement and Control
Honeywell
1100 Virginia Drive
Fort Washington, PA 19034
44-01-25-14I 1203 Printed in USA
www.honeywell.com/imc
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|